00542662-product description(v100r001c01_02)

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

V100R001C01

Product Description

Issue 02

Date 2009-10-15

Part Number 00542662

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided “AS IS” without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-11.1 Introduction to the Equipment.........................................................................................................................1-21.2 Network Application.......................................................................................................................................1-2

2 Equipment Features...................................................................................................................2-12.1 Service Types..................................................................................................................................................2-32.2 Service Processing Capabilities......................................................................................................................2-3

2.2.1 Switching Capabilities............................................................................................................................2-32.2.2 Maximum Access Capabilities...............................................................................................................2-3

2.3 Interface Types................................................................................................................................................2-42.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-42.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces................................................................................................2-5

2.4 Protection Capabilities....................................................................................................................................2-52.5 Microwave.......................................................................................................................................................2-62.6 QoS Capabilities..............................................................................................................................................2-62.7 OAM Features.................................................................................................................................................2-82.8 NSF Features...................................................................................................................................................2-82.9 Clock Features.................................................................................................................................................2-82.10 DCN Scheme...............................................................................................................................................2-10

3 System Structure.........................................................................................................................3-13.1 Software Structure...........................................................................................................................................3-23.2 Hardware Structure.........................................................................................................................................3-3

3.2.1 Chassis....................................................................................................................................................3-33.2.2 Boards.....................................................................................................................................................3-43.2.3 Fibers and Cables...................................................................................................................................3-6

4 Introduction to Services............................................................................................................4-14.1 Service Model.................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 L3VPN Services..............................................................................................................................................4-54.3 Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................................................4-84.4 IMA/ATM Services.......................................................................................................................................4-114.5 CES Services.................................................................................................................................................4-12

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description Contents

Issue 02 (2009-10-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

5 Introduction to Functions and Features.................................................................................5-15.1 MPLS..............................................................................................................................................................5-3

5.1.1 Background............................................................................................................................................5-35.1.2 Basic Concepts.......................................................................................................................................5-35.1.3 System Structure....................................................................................................................................5-55.1.4 MPLS Features of the Equipment..........................................................................................................5-5

5.2 IS-IS Routing Protocol....................................................................................................................................5-65.3 MPLS Signaling..............................................................................................................................................5-85.4 PWE3..............................................................................................................................................................5-85.5 IP Tunnels/GRE Tunnels..............................................................................................................................5-105.6 xDSL.............................................................................................................................................................5-115.7 Microwave.....................................................................................................................................................5-145.8 QoS................................................................................................................................................................5-185.9 BFD...............................................................................................................................................................5-20

6 Protection.....................................................................................................................................6-16.1 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................................6-26.2 Network Level Protection...............................................................................................................................6-2

6.2.1 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 and 1+1 Protection....................................................................................................6-36.2.2 Offload Protection..................................................................................................................................6-66.2.3 LMSP.....................................................................................................................................................6-76.2.4 LAG Protection......................................................................................................................................6-96.2.5 ML-PPP Protection..............................................................................................................................6-106.2.6 IMA Protection.....................................................................................................................................6-116.2.7 FRR Protection.....................................................................................................................................6-11

7 OAM............................................................................................................................................. 7-17.1 OAM Capability..............................................................................................................................................7-2

7.1.1 Operation and Configuration Tools........................................................................................................7-27.1.2 Monitoring and Maintenance.................................................................................................................7-27.1.3 Diagnosis and Debugging......................................................................................................................7-27.1.4 Expansion and Upgrade.........................................................................................................................7-3

7.2 U2000 System.................................................................................................................................................7-3

8 Security Management................................................................................................................8-18.1 Authentication Management...........................................................................................................................8-28.2 Authorization Management.............................................................................................................................8-28.3 Network Security Management.......................................................................................................................8-28.4 System Security Management.........................................................................................................................8-38.5 NE Security Log Management........................................................................................................................8-38.6 Syslog Management........................................................................................................................................8-3

9 Boards...........................................................................................................................................9-19.1 CXPA/CXPB...................................................................................................................................................9-3

9.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................9-3

ContentsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.1.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................9-39.1.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................9-69.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................9-89.1.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-139.1.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-139.1.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-14

9.2 CXPG/CXPH................................................................................................................................................9-149.2.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-159.2.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-159.2.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-179.2.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-199.2.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-249.2.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-249.2.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-24

9.3 EF8T..............................................................................................................................................................9-249.3.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-259.3.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-259.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-269.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-279.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-289.3.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-289.3.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-28

9.4 EF8F..............................................................................................................................................................9-299.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-299.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-299.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-309.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-319.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-329.4.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-329.4.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-32

9.5 EG2................................................................................................................................................................9-339.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-339.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-339.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-349.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-359.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-369.5.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-369.5.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-36

9.6 ML1/ML1A...................................................................................................................................................9-379.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-379.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-379.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-39



iii

9.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-419.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-439.6.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-439.6.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-43

9.7 CD1...............................................................................................................................................................9-439.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-449.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-449.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-469.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-489.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-499.7.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-499.7.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-50

9.8 IFE2...............................................................................................................................................................9-519.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-519.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-519.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-529.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-549.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-569.8.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-569.8.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-56

9.9 ADS2A/ADS2B............................................................................................................................................9-569.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................9-579.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................9-579.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................9-589.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................9-599.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-609.9.6 Board Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................9-609.9.7 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................9-61

9.10 SHD4...........................................................................................................................................................9-619.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................9-619.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................9-619.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................9-629.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-649.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-659.10.6 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................9-659.10.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................9-65

9.11 SHD4I..........................................................................................................................................................9-659.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................9-669.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................9-669.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................9-679.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-699.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-70


Product Description

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.11.6 Board Configuration Reference.........................................................................................................9-709.11.7 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................9-70

9.12 PIU..............................................................................................................................................................9-709.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................9-719.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................9-719.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................9-719.12.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-729.12.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-739.12.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................9-73

9.13 FAN.............................................................................................................................................................9-749.13.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................9-749.13.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................9-749.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................9-749.13.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-769.13.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-779.13.6 Technical Specifications....................................................................................................................9-77

10 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................10-110.1 Specifications of the Integrated Equipment................................................................................................10-310.2 System Performance Specifications............................................................................................................10-410.3 Technical Specifications of Boards.............................................................................................................10-4

10.3.1 CXPA/CXPB......................................................................................................................................10-510.3.2 CXPG/CXPH.....................................................................................................................................10-610.3.3 EF8T...................................................................................................................................................10-910.3.4 EF8F...................................................................................................................................................10-910.3.5 EG2...................................................................................................................................................10-1010.3.6 ML1/ML1A......................................................................................................................................10-1110.3.7 CD1..................................................................................................................................................10-1210.3.8 IFE2..................................................................................................................................................10-1310.3.9 ADS2A/ADS2B...............................................................................................................................10-1410.3.10 SHD4..............................................................................................................................................10-1510.3.11 SHD4I.............................................................................................................................................10-1510.3.12 PIU.................................................................................................................................................10-1610.3.13 FAN................................................................................................................................................10-16

10.4 Technical Specifications of Optical Interfaces..........................................................................................10-1610.5 Laser Safety Class.....................................................................................................................................10-1810.6 RF Performance.........................................................................................................................................10-18

10.6.1 Microwave Work Modes..................................................................................................................10-1910.6.2 Frequency Band................................................................................................................................10-2010.6.3 Receiver Sensitivity..........................................................................................................................10-2110.6.4 Transceiver Performance..................................................................................................................10-2310.6.5 IF Performance.................................................................................................................................10-2610.6.6 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem................................................................10-26



v

10.7 Specifications of Clock Interfaces.............................................................................................................10-2710.8 Reliability Specifications..........................................................................................................................10-2810.9 EMC Performance Specifications.............................................................................................................10-2810.10 Safety Certifications................................................................................................................................10-2910.11 Environment Requirements.....................................................................................................................10-30

10.11.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................10-3010.11.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................10-3210.11.3 Operation Environment..................................................................................................................10-34

A Compliant Standards and Protocols.....................................................................................A-1

B Label............................................................................................................................................B-1B.1 Safety Labels..................................................................................................................................................B-2B.2 Optical Module Labels...................................................................................................................................B-3

C Indicators....................................................................................................................................C-1

D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1

E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1


Product Description

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 910....................................................................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Typical networking of the OptiX PTN 910........................................................................................1-3Figure 1-3 PTN networking (accessing TDM services from the base station)....................................................1-4Figure 1-4 PTN networking (accessing ATM/IMA services from the base station)...........................................1-4Figure 1-5 PTN networking (accessing FE services from the base station).........................................................1-5Figure 1-6 Typical networking of the OptiX PTN 910 (offload scenario)...........................................................1-5Figure 2-1 QoS process........................................................................................................................................2-7Figure 2-2 Queue scheduling...............................................................................................................................2-7Figure 3-1 Software structure of the OptiX PTN 910..........................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-3 Board relations of the OptiX PTN 910...............................................................................................3-6Figure 3-4 Appearance of the power cable...........................................................................................................3-7Figure 3-5 Alarm cable.........................................................................................................................................3-8Figure 4-1 MPLS-based PWE3 service model of the OptiX PTN 910................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 BGP/MPLS service model of the OptiX PTN 910.............................................................................4-4Figure 4-3 Networking Application of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN.........................................................................4-6Figure 4-4 Service packet forwarding of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN......................................................................4-7Figure 4-5 E-Line service illustration................................................................................................................4-10Figure 4-6 E-Aggr service illustration................................................................................................................4-11Figure 4-7 Application model of the CES service.............................................................................................4-12Figure 4-8 Retiming synchronization mode of the CES service clock..............................................................4-13Figure 5-1 Label encapsulation structure.............................................................................................................5-4Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of labels in a packet.......................................................................................5-4Figure 5-3 Typical application scenario of PWE3...............................................................................................5-9Figure 5-4 ATM PWE3 services carried over MPLS tunnels............................................................................5-10Figure 5-5 ATM PWE3 services carried over IP tunnels...................................................................................5-11Figure 5-6 ATM PWE3 services carried over GRE tunnels..............................................................................5-11Figure 5-7 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the ETH mode...........5-12Figure 5-8 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IP mode (IP tunnel).............................................................................................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-9 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IP mode (GRE tunnel).............................................................................................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-10 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IP mode (IP Tunneland UDP PW)......................................................................................................................................................5-13

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description Figures


vii

Figure 5-11 1+1 HSB protection principle (in the transmit direction before the switching).............................5-15Figure 5-12 1+1 HSB protection principle (in the receive direction before the switching)...............................5-15Figure 5-13 1+1 FD protection principle (in the transmit direction).................................................................5-16Figure 5-14 1+1 FD protection principle (in the receive direction)...................................................................5-17Figure 5-15 1+1 SD protection principle (in the transmit direction).................................................................5-17Figure 5-16 1+1 SD protection principle (in the receive direction)...................................................................5-18Figure 6-1 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection..............................................................................................................6-3Figure 6-2 MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection...............................................................................................................6-4Figure 6-3 Offload protection...............................................................................................................................6-6Figure 6-4 1+1 LMSP...........................................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-5 1:1 LMSP............................................................................................................................................6-8Figure 6-6 Ethernet LAG protection....................................................................................................................6-9Figure 6-7 ML-PPP protection...........................................................................................................................6-11Figure 6-8 IMA transmission.............................................................................................................................6-11Figure 6-9 FRR Protection.................................................................................................................................6-13Figure 8-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting...........................................................................8-4Figure 9-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA......................................................................9-6Figure 9-2 Front panel of the CXPA....................................................................................................................9-8Figure 9-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPG....................................................................9-18Figure 9-4 Appearance of the front panel of the CXPG.....................................................................................9-19Figure 9-5 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8T...................................................................................9-26Figure 9-6 Font panel of the EF8T.....................................................................................................................9-27Figure 9-7 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8F...................................................................................9-30Figure 9-8 Font panel of the EF8F.....................................................................................................................9-31Figure 9-9 Block diagram for the functions of the EG2.....................................................................................9-34Figure 9-10 Font panel of the EG2.....................................................................................................................9-35Figure 9-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the ML1....................................................................9-39Figure 9-12 Front panel of the ML1...................................................................................................................9-41Figure 9-13 Front panel of the ML1A................................................................................................................9-41Figure 9-14 Block diagram for the working principle of the CD1.....................................................................9-46Figure 9-15 Appearance of the front panel of the CD1......................................................................................9-48Figure 9-16 Block diagram for the functions of the IFE2..................................................................................9-52Figure 9-17 Front panel of the IFE2...................................................................................................................9-55Figure 9-18 Block diagram for the working principle of the ADS2..................................................................9-58Figure 9-19 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2A................................................................................9-59Figure 9-20 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2B.................................................................................9-59Figure 9-21 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4..................................................................9-63Figure 9-22 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4...................................................................................9-64Figure 9-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4I.................................................................9-67Figure 9-24 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4I..................................................................................9-69Figure 9-25 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU......................................................................9-71Figure 9-26 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU.......................................................................................9-72

FiguresOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 9-27 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN....................................................................9-75Figure 9-28 Appearance of the front panel.........................................................................................................9-76Figure B-1 Label position....................................................................................................................................B-3

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description Figures


ix

Tables

Table 1-1 PTN networking application................................................................................................................1-3Table 2-1 Maximum service switching capability of the OptiX PTN 910...........................................................2-3Table 2-2 Maximum access capability of the OptiX PTN 910............................................................................ 2-4Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910............................................................................................ 2-4Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910.......................................................... 2-5Table 2-5 Network level protection provided by the OptiX PTN 910.................................................................2-6Table 2-6 QoS capabilities................................................................................................................................... 2-7Table 3-1 Boards supported by the OptiX PTN 910 and their valid slots............................................................3-4Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the power cable and protection grounding cable......................................3-7Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the E1 cable, the optical fiber, the IF jumper, and the telephone wire...............................................................................................................................................................................3-8Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the network cable..................................................................................... 3-8Table 4-1 Instances for service packet forwarding of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN...................................................4-7Table 4-2 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulated by the standardization organizations.................4-9Table 5-1 MPLS features supported by the OptiX PTN 910............................................................................... 5-6Table 5-2 Capabilities of the equipment of supporting PWE3.............................................................................5-9Table 6-1 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection....................................................................................6-4Table 6-2 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection...................................................................................6-5Table 6-3 Parameters of the 1+1 and 1:1 LMSP..................................................................................................6-8Table 9-1 Functions and Features of the CXPA...................................................................................................9-3Table 9-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA..................................................................................9-9Table 9-3 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface........................................................................................................9-10Table 9-4 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interface........................................................................9-10Table 9-5 Pins of the EXT/F1 interface..............................................................................................................9-12Table 9-6 Pins of the PHONE interface.............................................................................................................9-12Table 9-7 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface....................................................................................................9-13Table 9-8 Pins of the FE1-FE4 interfaces..........................................................................................................9-13Table 9-9 Functions and features of the CXPG..................................................................................................9-15Table 9-10 Interfaces on the CXPG...................................................................................................................9-20Table 9-11 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface......................................................................................................9-21Table 9-12 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces.....................................................................9-22Table 9-13 Pins of the PHONE interface...........................................................................................................9-23Table 9-14 Pins of the FE1 interface to FE4 interface.......................................................................................9-23Table 9-15 Pins of the GE optical interfaces......................................................................................................9-23

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description Tables


xi

Table 9-16 Functions and features of the EF8T.................................................................................................9-25Table 9-17 Types and usage of interfaces on the EF8T.....................................................................................9-28Table 9-18 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the EF8T.........................................................................................9-28Table 9-19 Functions and features of the EF8F.................................................................................................9-29Table 9-20 Interfaces of the EF8F......................................................................................................................9-32Table 9-21 Functions and Features of the EG2..................................................................................................9-33Table 9-22 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the EG2...........................................................................9-36Table 9-23 Functions and features of the ML1..................................................................................................9-37Table 9-24 Type and usage of the interface on the front panel of the ML1.......................................................9-41Table 9-25 Pins of the Anea 96 interface...........................................................................................................9-42Table 9-26 Functions and features of the CD1...................................................................................................9-44Table 9-27 Interfaces on the CD1.......................................................................................................................9-49Table 9-28 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte.................................................................9-50Table 9-29 Mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte.................................................................9-50Table 9-30 IFE2 interface description................................................................................................................9-55Table 9-31 ODU power switch...........................................................................................................................9-55Table 9-32 Functions and Features of the ADS2...............................................................................................9-57Table 9-33 Types and usage of the interfaces on the ADS2...............................................................................9-60Table 9-34 Pins of the ADSL1 and ADSL2 interface on the ADS2..................................................................9-60Table 9-35 Functions and Features of the SHD4...............................................................................................9-62Table 9-36 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4...............................................................................9-64Table 9-37 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4.................................................................9-65Table 9-38 Functions and Features of the SHD4I..............................................................................................9-66Table 9-39 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4I.............................................................................9-69Table 9-40 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4I...............................................................9-70Table 9-41 Functions and features of the PIU....................................................................................................9-71Table 9-42 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU..................................................................................9-73Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the chassis.............................................................................................10-3Table 10-2 System performance specifications..................................................................................................10-4Table 10-3 Specifications of FE electrical interfaces.........................................................................................10-6Table 10-4 Specifications of E1 interfaces.........................................................................................................10-6Table 10-5 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface..............................................................................10-7Table 10-6 Specifications of the GE interface....................................................................................................10-7Table 10-7 Wavelength allocation of the 1000BASE-CWDM optical interface and related optical module code.............................................................................................................................................................................10-8Table 10-8 Specifications of the E1 interface.....................................................................................................10-8Table 10-9 Specifications of interfaces on the EF8T.........................................................................................10-9Table 10-10 Specifications of the interfaces on the EF8F..................................................................................10-9Table 10-11 Specifications of the optical interfaces on the EG2.....................................................................10-10Table 10-12 Allocation of central wavelengths of 1000BASE-CWDM interfaces and related optical module code...........................................................................................................................................................................10-11Table 10-13 Specifications of the interfaces on the ML1/ML1A.....................................................................10-11Table 10-14 Specifications of the interfaces on the CD1.................................................................................10-12

TablesOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 10-15 IF performance.............................................................................................................................10-13Table 10-16 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem............................................................10-13Table 10-17 Performance specifications of the ADS2A..................................................................................10-14Table 10-18 Performance specifications of the ADS2B..................................................................................10-14Table 10-19 Performance specifications of the SHD4.....................................................................................10-15Table 10-20 Specifications of the interfaces of the SHD4I..............................................................................10-15Table 10-21 Technical specifications of the PIU.............................................................................................10-16Table 10-22 Technical specifications of the FAN............................................................................................10-16Table 10-23 Technical specifications of optical interfaces..............................................................................10-17Table 10-24 Wavelength allocation for 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces..............................................10-18Table 10-25 Microwave work modes...............................................................................................................10-19Table 10-26 Frequency band (SP ODUs).........................................................................................................10-20Table 10-27 Frequency band (SPA ODUs)......................................................................................................10-20Table 10-28 Frequency band (HP ODUs)........................................................................................................10-21Table 10-29 Typical receiver sensitivity values (i)..........................................................................................10-21Table 10-30 Typical receiver sensitivity values (ii).........................................................................................10-22Table 10-31 Typical receiver sensitivity values (iii)........................................................................................10-22Table 10-32 Typical receiver sensitivity values (iv)........................................................................................10-23Table 10-33 Transceiver performance (SP ODUs)..........................................................................................10-24Table 10-34 Transceiver performance (SPA ODUs)........................................................................................10-24Table 10-35 Transceiver performance (HP ODUs)..........................................................................................10-25Table 10-36 IF performance.............................................................................................................................10-26Table 10-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem.............................................................10-27Table 10-38 Description of clock interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910................................................................10-27Table 10-39 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................10-27Table 10-40 Reliability specifications of the OptiX PTN 910.........................................................................10-28Table 10-41 EMC test results...........................................................................................................................10-28Table 10-42 Safety certifications that the OptiX PTN 910 accords.................................................................10-30Table 10-43 Climate requirements for the storage of the OptiX PTN 910......................................................10-30Table 10-44 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................10-31Table 10-45 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................10-32Table 10-46 Requirements of mechanical stress for storage............................................................................10-32Table 10-47 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................10-32Table 10-48 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation...........................10-33Table 10-49 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................10-33Table 10-50 Requirements of mechanical stress for transportation.................................................................10-34Table 10-51 Requirements on temperature and humidity................................................................................10-35Table 10-52 Requirements on climate for operation........................................................................................10-35Table 10-53 Density restrictions for mechanical active substances during operation......................................10-36Table 10-54 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................10-36Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.................................................................10-36Table B-1 Label description.................................................................................................................................B-2

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description Tables


xiii

Table B-2 Codes and types of optical modules...................................................................................................B-4

TablesOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the networking application, functions, structure, features and hardwareof the OptiX PTN 910.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX PTN 910 V100R001C01

Huawei iManager U2000 V100R001C00

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l Network Planning Engineers

OrganizationThis document is organized as follows.

Chapter Description

1 Overview Describes the equipment features and the position of theequipment in the network.

2 Equipment Features Describes the service types, processing capability, serviceinterfaces, protection capability, QoS, OAM feature,microwave feature, NSF function and DCN mode that aresupported by the equipment.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description About This Document


1

Chapter Description

3 System Structure Describes the functional modules, software structure andhardware structure of the equipment.

4 Introduction to Services Describes the services of the equipment.

5 Introduction to Functionsand Features

Describes the main features of the equipment.

6 Protection Describes the equipment-level protection and network-levelprotection of the equipment.

7 OAM Describes the operation, maintenance and managementcapabilities of the equipment and the U2000 networkmanagement system used for the equipment.

8 Security Management Describes the main technical characteristics of theequipment in terms of safe operation.

9 Boards Describes the functions and features of the boards.

10 Technical Specifications Describes the technical specifications of the equipment.

A Compliant Standards andProtocols

Describes the compliant standards and protocols of theequipment.

B Label This chapter describes the cables of the equipment.

C Indicators This chapter describes the board indicators and theirindications.

D Glossary Lists the glossary used in this document.

E Acronyms andAbbreviations

Lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this document.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

About This DocumentOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Symbol Description

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

General ConventionsThe general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command ConventionsThe command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.



3

GUI ConventionsThe GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard OperationsThe keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse OperationsThe mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.

Update HistoryUpdates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue containsall updates made in previous issues.

Update in Issue 02 (2009-10-15) Based on Product Version V100R001C01Compared with the 01 version (2009-07-30), this version makes the following changes:


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Equipment features

l Clock feature: The description of the 1588 ACR clock is added.

Board description

l Description of the functions of the EF8T, EF8F, and EG2: The description of the automaticlaser shutdown function supported by the optical interface is deleted.

l Description of the front panels of the CXPG/CXPH, EF8F, EG2, and CD1– The description of the service interface on each board is modified.

– The description of the LOS1 and LOS2 indicators on the CD1 is modified.

l Description of the front panels of the CXPA: The description of the F1 interface and thedescription of the LAMP button are modified.

l Description of the functions of the IFE2: The description of the power distribution modessupported by the IFE2 is deleted.

Technical specifications

l Integrated equipment specifications: The description of the power consumption in the caseof typical configuration and highest configuration is added.

l Board technical specification:– The power consumption specifications of each board is added.

– The corresponding codes of optical modules are added to the technical specificationsof the optical interfaces on the CXPG/CXPH, EF8F, EG2, and CD1.

l The technical specifications of the optical interfaces are added.

l RF performance: The RF specifications are updated.

Labels

l Labels for optical modules: The description of mapping boards of all optical modules isadded.

Indicators

l The description of the LINK indicator supported by the CXPA board is added.

l The description of the LOS indicator supported by the CD1 is modified.

Update in Issue 01 (2009-07-30) Based on Product Version V100R001C01This document is the first release of the V100R001C01 version. Compared with the versionV100R001C00, the modifications are as follows:

l Introduction to support of the Fractional E1, the ATM E1 and the PW redundancy protectionis added.

l Details on the CXPG/H and CD1 are added, and the specifications of the two boards arealso added.

l The information about the functions and features of each board is optimized.

l Known defects are fixed.

Update in Issue 02 (2009-07-10) Based on Product Version V100R001C00Compared with the version 01 (2009-04-20), the modifications are as follows:



5

l Certain figures and tables are optimized.

l Known defects are fixed.

Update in Issue 01 (2009-04-20) Based on Product Version V100R001C00This document is the first release of the V100R001C00 version.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

1 Overview

About This Chapter

This chapter briefly describes the features of the OptiX PTN 910 and its application in thenetwork.

1.1 Introduction to the EquipmentThe OptiX PTN 910 is new generation mobile access optical transport equipment developed byHuawei for packet transport.

1.2 Network ApplicationThe OptiX PTN 910 is applied at the access layer of a mobile carrier network.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 1 Overview


1-1

1.1 Introduction to the EquipmentThe OptiX PTN 910 is new generation mobile access optical transport equipment developed byHuawei for packet transport.

The OptiX 910 has the following features:

l It adopts the packet transport technology to meet the increasing requirements on bandwidthand the demanding requirements on the flexibility of the bandwidth scheduling.

l It adopts the pseudo wire emulation edge to edge (PWE3) technology to carry connection-oriented services.

l It supports the access of services from base stations by using various modes, such as timedivision multiplexing (TDM), ATM/IMA, and fast Ethernet (FE) , and gigabit Ethernet(GE). It also supports the smooth evolution from the 2G mobile communication carriernetwork to the 3G mobile communication carrier network.

l With the complete operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM), Quality of Service(QoS), and protection switching mechanism, it adopts the multi-protocol label switch(MPLS) forwarding technology to optimize telecommunication carrier network and usesthe packet-based transport network to provide telecommunication services.

l It supports the offload solution to divide and carry the flow of base station services suchas the high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) services and R99 services, and usesthe x digital subscriber line (xDSL) board to transmit the HSDPA services through aninterconnected leased network, to reduce the transmission cost.

l It features small size and low weight. Thus, it can be installed in a cabinet, on a wall, or ona desk. As a result, the deployment cost of the equipment is low.

The OptiX PTN 910 equipment supports the packet microwave transmission, which greatlyenhances the networking flexibility and saves the cost of construction or leasing transmissionlinks.

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX PTN 910 equipment.

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX PTN 910

1.2 Network ApplicationThe OptiX PTN 910 is applied at the access layer of a mobile carrier network.

Position in the NetworkThe OptiX PTN 910 is directly placed on the wireless base station side. It converts servicesoutput from the base station and then sends the services to the convergence node.

Figure 1-2 shows typical networking of the OptiX PTN 910. The OptiX PTN 910 accessesservices from the base station side through TDM E1, ATM/IMA E1 or FE interfaces. The OptiX

1 OverviewOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

PTN equipment adopts ML-PPP, packet radio, FE or GE interfaces for networking. When theOffload solution is adopted, the OptiX PTN 910 is connected to the xDSL network through thexDSL interfaces to transmit the HSDPA services to the convergence nodes over the xDSLnetwork. The OptiX PTN 3900/1900 on the base station controller (BSC) or radio networkcontroller (RNC) side converges the services and then sends the services to the BSC or RNC.

Figure 1-2 Typical networking of the OptiX PTN 910

OptiX PTN 3900/OptiX PTN 1900OptiX PTN 950OptiX PTN 910

BSC RNC

GE 10GE

Wholesale xDSL/Ethernet

ML-PPP/FE/GE

Packet Radio

xDSL/FE/GE

GE

E1

ATM E1/IMA E1

FE

cSTM-1

ATM STM-1

GE/10GE

BTS NodeB

PTN Networking ScenarioThe OptiX PTN 910 is typically used for service backhaul between the BTS/NodeB and theBSC/RNC for mobile communication. Table 1-1 shows the application scenario of the OptiXPTN 910 together with other PTN equipment.

Table 1-1 PTN networking application

Item Description

Accessed service

TDM services accessedfrom the base station, asshown in Figure 1-3.

ATM/IMA servicesaccessed from the basestation, as shown inFigure 1-4.

FE services accessedfrom the base station, asshown in Figure 1-5.

Servicetype

CES ATM/IMA Ethernet

NNIinterface

FE, GE, ML-PPP (E1 or cSTM-1), packet-based microwave



1-3

Item Description

Applicationscenario

l E1/Fractional E1Transport using PWE3emulation.

l Structure-awareemulation andstructure-agnosticemulation of CESservices.

l The access nodeperforms PWE3emulation for theATM/IMA services.

l The ATM cellconcatenation issupported to improvethe bandwidthutilization on thenetwork side.

l The Ethernet servicesfrom FE interfaces areconverged at GEinterfaces.

l Ethernet services arerecovered at theconvergence node andsent to the RNCthrough the GEinterface.

Figure 1-3 PTN networking (accessing TDM services from the base station)

BSC

BTS

E1

E1

FE/GEML-PPP/

Microwave

OptiX PTN 3900/OptiX PTN 1900OptiX PTN 950

cSTM-1GE/ML-PPP

PTN networkFE/GE

ML-PPP/Microwave

OptiX PTN 910

Figure 1-4 PTN networking (accessing ATM/IMA services from the base station)

ATM E1/IMA E1


ATM STM-1

NodeB

RNC

GE/ML-PPP

PTN networkFE/GE

ML-PPP/Microwave

FE/GEML-PPP/

MicrowaveATM E1/IMA E1

OptiX PTN 910


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 1-5 PTN networking (accessing FE services from the base station)

FE


GE

NodeB

RNC

GE/ML-PPPPTN network

FE/GEML-PPP/

Microwave

FE/GEML-PPP/

Microwave

OptiX PTN 910

Offlaod ScenarioDuring service transmission between the NodeB and RNC for 3G mobile communication, thePTN equipment can divert the high speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) service from theservices. The HSDPA service then can be carried by a low-cost network that accesses andforwards packets, such as an ADSL network. In this way, the transmission cost is reduced andthe competitiveness of operators is enhanced.Figure 1-6 shows the offlaod scenario of the OptiXPTN 910.

l NodeB transports the service to the access station over ATM/IMA. The aggregation nodeconnects to RNC through the ATM STM-1 interface.

l The access node transports the signaling stream and R99 service stream to the aggregationnode over the Leased Line.

l The access node encapsulates the HSDPA service stream and transports it to the aggregationnode over the xDSL network.

Figure 1-6 Typical networking of the OptiX PTN 910 (offload scenario)

xDSL network

NodeB

OptiX PTN 912/910/950 OptiX PTN 3900

RNC

HSDPA flow

R99 flow

LL (Leased Line)

IMA



1-5


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

2 Equipment Features

About This Chapter

The OptiX PTN 910 supports various types of services and provides rich functions and featuresto ensure service transport quality and efficiency.

2.1 Service TypesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various types of services.

2.2 Service Processing CapabilitiesThe service processing capabilities of the OptiX PTN 910 are categorized into the switchingcapability and the service access capability.

2.3 Interface TypesThe external interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 are categorized into service interfaces,administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.4 Protection CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.5 MicrowaveThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the packet-based microwave transmission, which greatly enhancesthe networking flexibility and reduces the cost of creating or leasing transmission links.

2.6 QoS CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 has complete quality of service (QoS) capabilities, and provides the eightper-hop behavior (PHB) groups known as BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. Withthe equipment, the network operators can provide services of different quality classes for users.In this way, an integrated network emerges to carry data, voice and video services at the sametime.

2.7 OAM FeaturesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports MPLS OAM, to realize fast defect detection and service protection.In this way, the carrier-class quality of the service can be guaranteed in the packet switchingnetwork.

2.8 NSF FeaturesIn the case of the non-stop forwarding (NSF) function, data forwarding can be normallyperformed to protect services in the network even when the control plane of the equipment isfaulty.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 2 Equipment Features


2-1

2.9 Clock FeaturesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, IEEE 1588 V2 precisiontime protocol (PTP), and 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock synchronization. With theseclock solutions, the equipment provides high-precision time/clock for the mobilecommunication services.

2.10 DCN SchemeThe data communication network (DCN) is an integral part of network management, and is usedto transmit the network management information. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the inband DCNto ensure the intercommunication of network management information.

2 Equipment FeaturesOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

2.1 Service TypesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various types of services.

The OptiX PTN 910 can support the following services:

l Circuit emulation service (CES)

l ATM/IMA service

l Ethernet service

l L3VPN service

2.2 Service Processing CapabilitiesThe service processing capabilities of the OptiX PTN 910 are categorized into the switchingcapability and the service access capability.

2.2.1 Switching CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the packet-based service switching.

2.2.2 Maximum Access CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 is able to access services through various interfaces.

2.2.1 Switching CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the packet-based service switching.

Table 2-1 shows the maximum service switching capability of the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 2-1 Maximum service switching capability of the OptiX PTN 910

CXP selected Maximum SwitchingCapability

Line Rate I/O Capability

CXPA/CXPB 6.5 G 4.43 G

CXPG/CXPH 6.5 G 6.43 G

Note: The OptiX PTN 910 provides unidirectional switching capability of 6.5 Gbit/s in theingress and egress directions. That is, the OptiX PTN 910 provides bidirectional switchingcapability of 13 Gbit/s.

2.2.2 Maximum Access CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 is able to access services through various interfaces.

Table 2-2 lists the maximum access capabilities of various interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910.



2-3

Table 2-2 Maximum access capability of the OptiX PTN 910

Interface Type Number of Interfaces ofthe Board

Number of Interfaces of theEquipment

GE optical interface 2 6

FE optical interface 8 16

FE electrical interface 8 20

E1 16 48

Channelized STM-1 1 2

ADSL/ADSL2+ 2 4

G.SHDSL 4 pair 8 pair

Microwave IF interface 1 2

2.3 Interface TypesThe external interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 are categorized into service interfaces,administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service InterfacesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various interfaces to access different services.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfacesThe administration interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 include administration interfaces, clock/time interfaces, alarm interfaces, Orderwire interface, and 64 kbit/s synchronous data datainterface.

2.3.1 Service InterfacesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various interfaces to access different services.

Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces supported by the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910

Interface Type Description

GE Optical interface: 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX,1000BASE-VX, 1000BASE-ZX, and 1000BASE-CWDM

FE Optical interface: 100BASE-FXElectrical interface: 100BASE-TX

Channelized STM-1 STM-1 optical interface: S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2

E1 75-ohm or 120-ohm E1 electrical interface


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Interface Type Description

xDSL RJ-11 interface

Microwave intermediate frequency(IF) interface

Microwave intermediate frequency (IF) interface thatsupports the packet transport

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfacesThe administration interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 include administration interfaces, clock/time interfaces, alarm interfaces, Orderwire interface, and 64 kbit/s synchronous data datainterface.

Table 2-4 lists the administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910

InterfaceType

Description Quantity

Administrationinterface

NM network interface (ETH) 1 (RJ-45)

NM serial interface

Cascading network interface 1 (RJ-45)

Auxiliaryinterface

64 kbit/s synchronous data interface

Orderwire interface 1 (RJ-45)

Common interface for alarm inputand output(three channels for input and onechannel for output)

1 (RJ-45)

Clock/Timeinterface

Common interface for 120-ohmclock or time

2 (RJ-45)

NOTEThe clock/time interfaces can be used as the clock interfaces or the time interfaces. If the interfaces areused as the clock interfaces, they support 2048 kbit/s mode or 2048 kHz mode. If the interfaces are usedas the time interfaces, they support 1PPS + Time Information mode or DCLS mode.

The CXPG/CXPH does not provides the cascading network interface, the transparent data interface or thecommon interface for alarm input and output.

2.4 Protection CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

In the case of equipment level protection, the OptiX PTN 910 supports 1+1 protection of theinput power supply.



2-5

In addition, OptiX PTN 910 supports microwave protection.

The OptiX PTN 910 provides various network level protection schemes, as listed in Table2-5.

Table 2-5 Network level protection provided by the OptiX PTN 910

Network Level Protection Scheme

MPLS MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection

MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection

LSP RR protection

LSP FRR protection

PW redundancy protection

Ethernet Link aggregation group (LAG) protection

Channelized STM-1 1+1 LMSP

1:1 LMSP

IMA group IMA member protection

ML-PPP group ML-PPP member protection

2.5 MicrowaveThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the packet-based microwave transmission, which greatly enhancesthe networking flexibility and reduces the cost of creating or leasing transmission links.

The IF board of the OptiX PTN 910 supports the following microwave functions:

l Supports clock synchronization at the physical layer.l Supports 6 GHz, 7 GHz, 8 GHz, 11 GHz, 13 GHz, 15 GHz, 18 GHz, 23 GHz, 26 GHz, 32

GHz, and 38 GHz frequency bands.l Supports the adaptive and modulation (AM) function, supports the 16 quadrature amplitude

modulation (QAM), 32 QAM, 64 QAM, 128 QAM, 256 QAM, and quadrature phase shiftkeying (QPSK), and supports the 7M, 14M, 28M, and 56M channel spacing.

l Supports three protection schemes, that is, 1+1 hot standby (HSB), 1+1 frequency diversity(FD), and 1+1 space diversity (SD).

l Supports the automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.l Supports the orderwire in microwave links. (EOW)l Supports the G.703 synchronous transparent data interface and the transparent transmission

of NM information of other microwave equipment in microwave links.

2.6 QoS CapabilitiesThe OptiX PTN 910 has complete quality of service (QoS) capabilities, and provides the eightper-hop behavior (PHB) groups known as BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, CS6, and CS7. With


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

the equipment, the network operators can provide services of different quality classes for users.In this way, an integrated network emerges to carry data, voice and video services at the sametime.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports QoS mechanisms such as flow classification, committed accessrate (CAR), and queue scheduling, as listed in Table 2-6 and Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 QoS process

Queue scheduling

Egress portFlow

classification CAR Forwarding

Ingress port

Table 2-6 QoS capabilities

Feature Description

Flowclassification

Performs simple flow classification on VLAN packets, IP packets andMPLS packets.

CAR Supports the color-blind mode.

Queuescheduling

l Each physical port supports queue scheduling based on eight priorities.

l Adopts strict priority (SP) to schedule CS7, CS6, and EF queues.

l Adopts weighted fair queuing (WFQ) to schedule AF queues.

l Adopts SP to schedule BE queues.

See Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Queue scheduling

CQ

WFQ

SP

SP

EgressChannel

WREDCS7

AF3

BE

Shaping

EgressChannel 8

…GE

Shaping

Shaping

1

CS6EFAF4

AF2AF1

H

M

L



2-7

2.7 OAM FeaturesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports MPLS OAM, to realize fast defect detection and service protection.In this way, the carrier-class quality of the service can be guaranteed in the packet switchingnetwork.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following MPLS OAM functions:

l The equipment provides hardware support to transmit and receive connectivity verification(CV), fast failure detection (FFD), forward defect indicator (FDI), and backward defectindicator (BDI) messages, perform timeout judgment for these messages, and realize fastcontinuity check and failure indication. This complies with ITU-T Y.1710 and ITU-T Y.1711.

l The equipment supports triggering the MPLS protection switching by the MPLS OAMfailure indication, to ensure fast restoration of services.

l The equipment supports the ping and traceroute for MPLS tunnels to detect and locatefaults.

l The equipment supports the CVVC ping for PWs to detect faults.

l The equipment supports the performance monitoring (PM) for MPLS tunnels and PWs. Incompliance with ITU-T Y.1731, the equipment provides hardware support to monitor thepacket loss ratio, packet delay, and jitter.

The equipment supports ATM OAM, including the fault management in the F4 OAM and F5OAM.

The equipment supports the bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) function.

2.8 NSF FeaturesIn the case of the non-stop forwarding (NSF) function, data forwarding can be normallyperformed to protect services in the network even when the control plane of the equipment isfaulty.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the NSF function when a warm reset is performed for a systemcontrol, switching, and timing board.

2.9 Clock FeaturesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the physical-layer clock synchronization, IEEE 1588 V2 precisiontime protocol (PTP), and 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock synchronization. With theseclock solutions, the equipment provides high-precision time/clock for the mobilecommunication services.

Physical Layer Clock Synchronization

In the case of the physical layer clock synchronization mechanism, the clock information isextracted from signals in the physical channel of the transmission link and thus the frequencysynchronization is achieved.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Besides the clock/time interface, the OptiX PTN 910 supports extracting the clock informationfrom the following transmission links:l Synchronous Ethernet link

l Channelized STM-1 link

l E1 link

l Microwave link

l G.SHDSL link

NOTE

The NTR clock is a technology used to synchronize the clock at the G.SHDSL physical layer. Clock signalsare extracted directly from the serial bit flow on the G.SHDSL link. These clock signals are then used fordata transmission. In this way, the clock signals are transferred.

IEEE 1588 V2IEEE 1588 V2 is a time synchronization protocol that provides the nanosecond accuracy to meetthe requirements of 3G base stations. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following features ofIEEE 1588V2:l The equipment can use the IEEE 1588V2 protocol to achieve the clock timing

synchronization and time information synchronization.l The equipment supports the boundary clock (BC), ordinary clock (OC), and transparent

clock (TC, including the end-to-end transparent clock and peer-to-peer transparent clock).The equipment can be configured with different clocks according to the requirement.

l The equipment supports the clock source switching.

IEEE 1588 ACRIEEE 1588 ACR refers to a process of synchronizing the frequency of the equipment at bothends of a PSN network. In this process, the master equipment that supports the IEEE 1588 V2protocol encapsulates the local system clock information into IEEE 1588 V2 packets (also PTPpackets) and transports the packets to a third-party network, which then transparently transportsthe packets to the slave equipment opposite to the master equipment. When receiving the packets,the slave equipment extracts the time stamps from the IEEE 1588 V2 packets and recovers theclock.

For this clock solution, the intermediate third-party network does not need to support the IEEE1588 V2 protocol.

The IEEE 1588 V2 clock packets supported by the OptiX PTN equipment are multicast Ethernetpackets. The OptiX PTN equipment on the RNC side adds the time stamps with systeminformation to the IEEE 1588 V2 clock packets. Then, on the third-party equipment, the clockinformation is multicast to the OptiX PTN equipment on the NodeB side. When receiving theIEEE 1588 V2 clock packets, the OptiX PTN equipment extracts the time stamps, recovers theclock by calculation, and uses the clock as the system clock. In addition, the OptiX PTNequipment transports the clock to NodeB. In this manner, the equipment at both ends of thenetwork achieves frequency synchronization.



2-9

2.10 DCN SchemeThe data communication network (DCN) is an integral part of network management, and is usedto transmit the network management information. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the inband DCNto ensure the intercommunication of network management information.

The OptiX PTN 910 adopts the inband DCN scheme, and thus customers need not establishprivate DCN channels. This greatly reduces the network construction cost.

IP tunnel, GRE tunnel and physical interfaces support the DCN information transmission. Theinterfaces that support the DCN information transmission include the following:

l FE interface

l GE interface

l E1 interface

l Microwave interface

l cSTM-1 interface


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

3 System Structure

About This Chapter

The system structure is classified into the software structure and the hardware structure.

3.1 Software StructureThe equipment software manages, monitors, and controls the NEs. As a communication serviceelement between the U2000 and boards, the equipment software helps the U2000 to control andmanage the NEs.

3.2 Hardware StructureThe equipment hardware includes the chassis, boards, optical fibers, and cables.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 3 System Structure


3-1

3.1 Software StructureThe equipment software manages, monitors, and controls the NEs. As a communication serviceelement between the U2000 and boards, the equipment software helps the U2000 to control andmanage the NEs.

The equipment software belongs to the element management layer in the telecommunicationsmanagement network (TMN), and provides NE functions, some coordination functions, andoperating system functions at the network element layer. The equipment software uses the datacommunication function for the communication between the NE and other parts, includingequipment, the U2000 and other NEs.

Figure 3-1 shows the software structure of the OptiX PTN 910.

Figure 3-1 Software structure of the OptiX PTN 910

Configuration module

Software platform

Alarm and performancemanagement

Interface management

DCN

Basic frame

Control module

Hardware drive

Software PlatformThe software platform includes the interface management module, the alarm and performancemanagement module, and the DCN module.

The interface management module converts commands that have different forms and aretransmitted from terminals of different types into internal commands that are of the same form.

By using the alarm and performance management module, current alarms can be automaticallyreported and queried, history alarms can be saved and queried, and events can be reported.

DCN module processes the DCN packets, and provides the communication between the localNE and other parts, including the U2000 and other NEs.

Control ModuleThe control module has the following function:

l Provides a uniform static or dynamic MPLS label distribution mechanism.

l Provides the routing protocol and route selecting algorithm that are related to dynamicservice creation.

l Provides the protocol that are related to the neighbor auto-discovery function of thetransport plane.

3 System StructureOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Configuration ModuleThe configuration module has the following functions:

l Manages configuration of the entire NE, including service management, equipmentmanagement, resource management, and protocol configuration agent.

l Sets and queries attributes of the alarm and performance.

l Queries and automatically reports performance data.

l Suppresses inter-board alarms and queries alarms of specified objects.

l Constantly stores configuration data.

l Processes MPLS packets.

l Provides the QoS function.

Basic Frame and Hardware DriveThe basic frame and hardware drive provide the basic platform kernel and system support. Forexample, the basic frame and hardware drive realize the board management, distributed messagemanagement, and log management.

3.2 Hardware StructureThe equipment hardware includes the chassis, boards, optical fibers, and cables.

3.2.1 ChassisThe OptiX PTN 910 is case-shaped for easy deployment.

3.2.2 BoardsBoards are the key hardware components of the equipment.

3.2.3 Fibers and CablesFibers and cables mainly include power cables, protection grounding cables, service fibers andcables, and auxiliary cables.

3.2.1 ChassisThe OptiX PTN 910 is case-shaped for easy deployment.

The dimensions of the OptiX PTN 910 are 442 mm (width) x 220 mm (depth) x 1 U (height, 1U = 44.45 mm).

The OptiX PTN 910 can be installed in the following:

l ETSI cabinet (300 mm deep)

l ETSI cabinet (600 mm deep)

l 19 inch cabinet (450 mm deep)

l 19 inch cabinet (600 mm deep)

l Open rack

l Wall

l Desktop

Figure 3-2 shows the slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910.



3-3

Figure 3-2 Slot allocation of the OptiX PTN 910

SLOT 3 SLOT 4SLOT5 SLOT 1 and SLOT 2

SLOT6

3.2.2 BoardsBoards are the key hardware components of the equipment.

Board Description and Valid Slots

Table 3-1 shows the boards supported by the OptiX PTN 910 and their valid slots.

Table 3-1 Boards supported by the OptiX PTN 910 and their valid slots

Board Name Board Description Valid Slot

CXPA System control, switchingand timing board, with 4 x FEservice interfaces and 16 x E1interfaces (matching 75-ohmE1)

Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPB System control, switchingand timing board, with 4 x FEservice interfaces and 16 x E1interfaces (matching 120-ohm E1)

Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPG System control, switchingand timing board, with 4 x FEservice interfaces, 2 x GEservice interfaces, and 16 xE1 interfaces (matching 75-ohm E1)

Slot 1 and slot 2

CXPH System control, switchingand timing board, with 4 x FEservice interfaces, 2 x GEservice interfaces, and 16 xE1 interfaces (matching 120-ohm E1)

Slot 1 and slot 2

EF8T 8 x FE service interface board(electric interface)

Slot 3, slot 4

EF8F 8 x FE service interface board(optical interface)

Slot 3, slot 4

EG2 2 x GE service interfaceboard

Slot 3, slot 4


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Board Name Board Description Valid Slot

ML1 16 x E1 service processingboard (75 ohms)

Slot 3, slot 4

ML1A 16 x E1 service processingboard (120 ohms)

Slot 3, slot 4

CD1 1 x channelized STM-1service processing board

Slot 3, slot 4

ADS2A/ADS2B 2 x ADSL2+ interface board Slot 3, slot 4

SHD4 4 x G.SHDSL interface board(supporting the ATM modeand EFM mode)

Slot 3, slot 4

SHD4I 4 x G.SHDSL interface board(supporting the IMA mode)

Slot 3, slot 4

IFE2 IF board, which provides420Mbit/s EthernetThroughput and the packet-based microwave service.

Slot 3, slot 4

PIU Power board Slot 5

FAN Fan board Slot 6

NOTE

l The CXPA and CXPB each house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one CXPA or CXPB. As the CXPAand CXPB have the same functions except for the match impedance, this document describes only theCXPA instead of both.

l The CXPG and CXPH each house two slots. Slot 1 and slot 2 house one CXPG or CXPH. As the CXPGand CXPH have the same functions except for the match impedance, this document describes only theCXPG instead of both.

l The second port of the CD1 can be used for only the LMSP protection.

l As the ML1 and ML1A have the same functions except for the match impedance, this documentdescribes only the ML1 instead of both.

l The ADS2A supports the Annex A mode. The ADS2B supports the Annex B mode.

Board RelationsThe OptiX PTN 910 uses different boards to achieve various functions.

Figure 3-3 shows board relations of the OptiX PTN 910.



3-5

Figure 3-3 Board relations of the OptiX PTN 910

Network side

E1

User sideControl and

management module

Service processing

and forwarding

module

Clock module

Power module

PIU

Heat dissipation

module FAN

CXPA/CXPB/CXPG/CXPH

GEFE

Packet microwave

-48 V DC/-60 V DC

E1

1 2 543 876

ADSL2+

G.SHDSL

FE

E1

FE

E1

FE

EF8T

EF8F

EG2

EF8T

EF8F

EG2

SHD4/SHD4I

IFE2

ADS2

ML1/ML1A

ML1/ML1A

GE

GE

GE

-48 V DC/-60 V DC

1.Orderwire interface2.NM network interface3.Alarm interface4.Synchronous data interface5.NE serial interface6.Clock interface7.Time interface8.Concatenation interface

GE

Channelized STM-1 CD1

GE

CD1Channelized STM-1

NOTE

Only the CXPA/CXPB supports the NM cascading interface, transparent data interface, and alarm interface.

The GE signal can be accessed from the front panel of only the CXPG/CXPH.

3.2.3 Fibers and CablesFibers and cables mainly include power cables, protection grounding cables, service fibers andcables, and auxiliary cables.

Power Cables and Protection Grounding CablesPower cables need to be produced on site. The power cables are made of 1U DC connectors,single cord end terminals, and wires. Figure 3-4 shows the appearance of a power cable. Thetechnical specifications of the power cable are listed in Table 3-2.

Protection grounding cables are made of wires and OT terminals. The technical specificationsof the protection grounding cable are listed in Table 3-2.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 3-4 Appearance of the power cable

1U DC connector

Single cord end terminal

Power cable

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the power cable and protection grounding cable

Item Wire Related Parameter Terminal Related Parameter

2.5 mm2

power cableand terminal

Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/750V, H07Z, K, 2.5 mm2, blue/black green, fire resistant cablewith low smoke and no halogen

Bare crimp terminal, single cord endterminal, 2.5 mm2, 12.5 A, tin plating, 8mm deep, blue

Protectiongroundingcable

Electronic/Electric wire, 450 V/750 V, H07Z, K, 2.5 mm2,yellow green, fire resistant cablewith low smoke and no halogen

Bare crimp terminal, OT, 2.5 mm2, M4, tinplating, pre-insulated ring terminal,16-14AWG, blue

NOTE

In the case of the OptiX PTN 910 equipment, there are following limitations on mapping relations betweenthe cable length and the cross-sectional area.

If the cross-sectional area is 2.5 mm2, the maximum cable length is 50 m.

Service Fibers and CablesService fibers and cables mainly include E1 cables, optical fibers, IF jumper, telephone wires,and network cables. Table 3-3 lists the technical specifications of the E1 cable, the optical fiber,the IF jumper, and the telephone wire. Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the networkcable.



3-7

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the E1 cable, the optical fiber, the IF jumper, and thetelephone wire

Item Parameter

E1 cable l Trunk cable, 75 ohms, 16E1, 1.6 mm, (Anea96 straightconnector - I), (SYFVZP75-1.1/0.26*32(S)), 45 degrees

l Trunk cable, 120 ohms, 16E1, 0.4 mm, (Anea96 straightconnector), (120CC32P0.4P430U(S)), 45 degrees

NOTEThe length of the E1 cable can be: 5 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 35m, 40 m, 45 m, and 50 m.

Optical fiber Fiber set-OptiX PTN-external fiber set

IF jumper Single cable, RF cable, 2 m, TNC50AM-III, RG223/U, N50SF-V

Telephone wire Single cable, two-core common telephone straight wire, RJ11/two-core wire/RJ11, (2.00 m), (network port 6bit), (28UL20251-2Cblack), (network port 6bit)

Auxiliary Cables

Auxiliary cables are classified into clock cables, management cables, orderwire cables, andalarm cables. The common auxiliary cables for the OptiX PTN 910 equipment are networkcables, which are made on site. Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the network cable.

Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the network cable

Item Parameter

Networkportconnector

Network port connector, 8PIN, 8bit, shielded, crystal model connector

Cable model Twisted-Pair cable, 100 ohms, enhanced category 5 cable; aluminum coppershielded, 0.52 mm, 24AWG, 8 cores; four pairs, PANTONE 430U

NOTE

The alarm cable needs to be made on site. For details on how to make the alarm concatenation cable, refer toQuick Installation and Commissioning Guide. Figure 3-5 shows the appearance of an alarm concatenation cable.

Figure 3-5 Alarm cable


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)



3-9

4 Introduction to Services

About This Chapter

The following describes services of the equipment.

4.1 Service ModelThe OptiX PTN 910 adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process Ethernet services, ATMservices, and CES services. The OptiX PTN 910 adopts the BGP/MPLS model to processL3VPN services.

4.2 L3VPN ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports border gateway protocol (BGP)-based or MPLS-based layer3virtual private network (L3VPN) services. The equipment provides a complete L3VPN solution.

4.3 Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides E-line and E-Aggr services over the public PSN for customers byusing the L2VPN technology.

4.4 IMA/ATM ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides ATM emulation services by means of PWs in the packet-basedtransport network. The OptiX PTN 910 can access ATM services directly through the E1/cSTM-1 interface or by using the IMA technology.

4.5 CES ServicesIn a packet-based transport network, the CES circuit emulation technology is used totransparently transmit TDM circuit switching data. The OptiX PTN 910 supports emulatedtransparent transmission of the TDM E1/Fractional E1 services.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 4 Introduction to Services


4-1

4.1 Service ModelThe OptiX PTN 910 adopts the MPLS-based PWE3 model to process Ethernet services, ATMservices, and CES services. The OptiX PTN 910 adopts the BGP/MPLS model to processL3VPN services.

MPLS-Based PWE3 ModelFigure 4-1 shows the MPLS-based PWE3 service model of the OptiX PTN 910.

Figure 4-1 MPLS-based PWE3 service model of the OptiX PTN 910

Fowarder

Native service processing layer

PWE3

PW label

Tunnel label

TDMATM

IMA

TDM ATM EthernetEthernet switching

ATM switching

TDM processing

E1/Frac E1/cSTM-1

E1/cSTM-1

PPP (MP)

Ethernet

UNI NNI

E1/Frac E1/cSTM-1

GEFE

EFM/ATM

FE/GE

Ethernet

802.2802.3

ML-PPP

IF interface

802.2802.3

xDSL

MicrowaveADSL/G.SHDSL

E1/Frac E1/cSTM-1

Service interface layer

Physical layer

To CE

Data link layer and

physical layer

To PSN

MPLS layer

PWE3 encapsulation

layer

Emulation service layer

On the UNI side, the equipment is connected to the customer edge (CE) to access user servicesto the packet switching network (PSN). In the case of the MPLS-based PWE3 model, layers onthe UNI side have the following functions.

l Physical layerThe physical layer provides interfaces to connect transmission media, such as cables orfibers, to the PTN equipment.– In the direction from the CE to the provider edge (PE), the physical layer processes the

physical signals (electrical or optical signals) transmitted from the user-side equipment,extracts information from the signals, and then sends the signals to the service interfacelayer.

– In the PE-to-CE direction, the physical layer receives information transmitted from theservice interface layer, converts the information into signals that can be transmitted overcables or fibers, and then sends the signals to the user-side equipment through thephysical channel.

l Service interface layer

4 Introduction to ServicesOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

– In the CE-to-PE direction, the service interface layer receives information transmittedfrom the physical layer, distinguishes the service types, and sends the information tothe native service process layer for processing.

– In the PE-to-CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals transmittedfrom the native service processing layer and sends the signals to the physical layerthrough proper physical channels.

l Native service processing layerThe native service processing layer processes different services according to the userrequirements.

On the NNI side, the equipment is connected to the PSN equipment to complete the transmissionof user services in the PSN network. In the service model, layers on the NNI side have thefollowing functions.

l Emulation service layerThe emulation service layer corresponds to the payload that is to be encapsulated into thePW. An emulation service corresponds to a PW. The emulation service layer is an abstractlogical layer and no specific operation is performed at this layer.

l PWE3 encapsulation layerThe PWE3 encapsulation layer uses different encapsulation modes for different emulationservices. At the PWE3 encapsulation layer, emulation services are uniformly encapsulatedinto PWE3 packets, or different emulation services are decapsulated from PWE3 packets.

l MPLS layerThe MPLS layer includes two MPLS labels:– The external MPLS label is a tunnel label, which is used to create and maintain a tunnel

between PEs at two ends of a service. The tunnel crosses an MPLS network to carryPWs.

– The internal MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.

l Data link layer and physical layerThe data link layer and the physical layer work as the MPLS carrier layer and provide linksfor the MPLS layer to transmit data. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following types ofnetwork-side links.– Ethernet link (FE interface or GE interface)

– ML-PPP link (E1 interface or channelized STM-1 interface)

– xDSL link (ADSL/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL)

– Microwave link

The forwarder located between the UNI and the NNI mutually forwards the services processedon the UNI side and the emulation services on the NNI side.

BGP/MPLS ModelFigure 4-2 shows the BGP/MPLS service model of the OptiX PTN 910.



4-3

Figure 4-2 BGP/MPLS service model of the OptiX PTN 910

VPN label

Tunnel label

To CE To PSN

VRF

FE/GE

802.2802.3

EthernetML-PPP

E1/cSTM-1

PPP (MP)

IP

UNI NNI

FE GE E1/cSTM-1

IPoE1EFM/ATM

Intermedia interface

802.2802.3

xDSL

MicrowaveADSL/

G.SHDSL

Native serviceprocessing layer

Service interfacelayer

Physical layer

MPLS layer

Data link layer and

physical layer

On the UNI side, the equipment is connected to the customer edge (CE) to access the L3VPNservices to the PSN. In the case of the BGP/MPLS model, layers on the UNI side have thefollowing functions.

l Physical layer

The physical layer provides interfaces to connect transmission media, such as cables orfibers, to the PTN equipment.

– In the CE-to-PE direction, the physical layer processes the physical signals (electricalor optical signals) transmitted from the user-side equipment, extracts information fromthe signals, and then sends the signals to the service interface layer.

– In the PE-to-CE direction, the physical layer receives information transmitted from theservice interface layer, converts the information into signals that can be transmitted overthe transmission medium, and then sends the signals to the user-side equipment throughthe physical channel.

l Service interface layer

– In the CE-to-PE direction, the service interface layer receives information transmittedfrom the physical layer, extracts and sends IP packets to corresponding VPN routingand forwarding tables (VRFs) for processing.

– In the PE-to-CE direction, the service interface layer receives service signals transmittedfrom VRFs, selects proper types of physical channels, and sends the service signals ontothe physical layer.

l Native service processing module

On the native service processing layer, respective VRF processes each L3VPN service. TheVRF has the following functions:

– Forwards IP packets of each service port (UNI ports and NNI ports) in the native VPNaccording to the routing table of the VPN.

– Updates routes connected to the CE by running the same routing protocol as CE.

– Updates routes of the VPN by using the multi-protocol extensions for border gatewayprotocol (MP-BGP) on all equipment in the VPN.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

On the NNI side, the native service processing layer is connected to the PSN equipment totransmit the L3VPN services in the PSN network. In the case of the BGP/MPLS service model,layers on the NNI side have the following functions.

l MPLS layerThe MPLS layer includes two MPLS labels:– The external MPLS label is a tunnel label, which is used to create and maintain a tunnel

between PEs at two ends of a service. The tunnel crosses an MPLS network to carryPWs.

– The internal MPLS label is a PW label, which identifies a PW in a tunnel.

l Data link layer and physical layerThe data link layer and the physical layer work as the MPLS carrier layer and provide linksfor the MPLS layer to transmit data. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following types ofnetwork-side links.– Ethernet link (FE interface or GE interface)

– xDSL link (ADSL/ADSL2+/G.SHDSL)

– Microwave link

– ML-PPP link (E1 interface or channelized STM-1 interface)

4.2 L3VPN ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 supports border gateway protocol (BGP)-based or MPLS-based layer3virtual private network (L3VPN) services. The equipment provides a complete L3VPN solution.

Basic ConceptsThe BGP/MPLS L3VPN, based on the PE, is an L3VPN technology of the provider provisionedVPN (PPVPN). It uses the BGP to issue VPN routes in the backbone network of the serviceprovider and uses the MPLS to forward VPN packets in the backbone network of the serviceprovider.

The BGP/MPLS L3VPN enables flexible networking and can be easily extended. In addition,the BGP/MPLS L3VPN supports the MPLS QoS and MPLS TE.

Figure 4-3 shows the schematic diagram of BGP/MPLS L3VPN application. The L3VPNservice of the OptiX PTN 910 supports the access of IP packets by using the ML-PPP and theEthernet interface as the client-side interface.

Basic concepts related to the BGP/MPLS L3VPN include customer edge (CE), provider edge(PE), provider (P), and site.

l CE is the edge equipment in the user network and has interfaces to directly connect thenetwork of the service provider. A CE can be a router, a switch, or a host. Normally, a CEcannot sense the existence of the VPN and need not support the MPLS.

l PE is the edge router of the service provider. It is the edge equipment in the network of theservice provide and is directly connected to the CE. In the MPLS network, all the processingrelated to the VPN is performed on the PE.

l P is the backbone router in the network of the service provider. It is not directly connectedto the CE. The P equipment needs to have only the basic MPLS forwarding capability andit does not maintain the VPN information.



4-5

Figure 4-3 Networking Application of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN

CE-A

VPN 1

VPN 1VPN 2

PEPE

PE

PPVPN 2

CE-B

CE-C

CE-D

PP

Backbone network

Route DiffusionThe route is the basis of the Layer 3 IP forwarding. The diffusion and differentiation of routersis a core problem to be solved by the L3VPN solution

The BGP/MPLS L3VPN solution of the OptiX PTN equipment supports the following routingmechanisms:

l Runs the open shortest path first (OSPF), routing information protocol (RIP), and E-BGProuting protocols together with the CE to complete the VPN route diffusion between thelocal equipment and the CE.

l Uses the MP-BGP protocol to complete the VPN route diffusion between PEs in the sameVPN.

l Uses the IS-IS routing protocol for networking between the OptiX PTN equipment.

Service ForwardingThe BGP/MPLS L3VPN adopts the MPLS technology to forward service packets by using twoMPLS labels. On the PE connected to the CE, the VPN, to which a service packet belongs, isdistinguished by using the inner MPLS label. When traveling the public PSN, the service packetsare forwarded in the public PSN by using the outer MPLS label.

As shown in Figure 4-4, IP packets of the CE-C in VPN 2 need be transmitted to the subnetconnected to CE-B. For the packet forwarding process, see Table 4-1.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 4-4 Service packet forwarding of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN

CE-A

VPN 1

VPN 1

VPN 2

PE-YPE-X

VPN 2

CE-B

CE-C

CE-D

Link

P2P1

Label 1VPN 2

IP

LinkLabel 2VPN 2

IP

LinkLabel 3VPN 2

IP

ETHIP

PE-Z

P4P3

E1ML-PPP

IP

Table 4-1 Instances for service packet forwarding of the BGP/MPLS L3VPN

NE Action Description Label Stack

CE-C Forwards a IPpacket.

The destination IP address is the hostthat is connected to CE-B and islocated in VPN 2. The IP packet istransmitted to PE-Y through anIPoE1 link.

E1ML-PPP

IP

PE-Y Extracts the IPpacket.

PE-Y extracts the IP packet from theEthernet link that is connected to CE-C.

IP

PE-Y Determines theVPN that the IPpacket belongsto.

PE-Y determines that the packetbelongs to VPN 2 based on theEthernet port and then adds a MPLSprivate label, which corresponds toVPN 2, to the IP packet.

VPN 2IP

PE-Y Routes andforwards thepacket.

PE-Y checks for the virtual routingand forwarding (VRF) tablecorresponding to VPN 2. Based onthe VRF table, it learns that thepacket should be forwarded to thetunnel between PE-Y and PE-X.Then, PE-Y adds MPLS label 1,which corresponds to the tunnel, tothe IP packet.

LinkLabel 1VPN 2

IP



4-7

NE Action Description Label Stack

P2 MPLSforwarding

P2 extracts the outer MPLS labelfrom the packet and checks for theMPLS forwarding table. Then, P2forwards the MPLS forwarding tableto the link connected to P1 andexchanges the outer label with label2.

LinkLabel 2VPN 2

IP

P1 MPLSforwarding

P1 extracts the outer MPLS labelfrom the packet and checks for theMPLS forwarding table. Then, P2forwards the MPLS forwarding tableto the link connected to PE-X andexchanges the outer label with label3.

LinkLabel 3VPN 2

IP

PE-X Determines theVPN that thepacket belongsto.

PE-X extracts the forwarded MPLSpacket, strips the two MPLS labels,and determines that the packetbelongs to VPN 2 based on the innerlabel.

IP

PE-X Routes andforwards thepacket.

PE-X checks for the VRF tablecorresponding to VPN 2. Based onthe VRF table, it learns that thepacket should be forwarded to theEthernet link connected to CE-B.Then, PE-X adds Ethernetencapsulation to the IP packet andsends it to CE-B.

ETHIP

4.3 Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides E-line and E-Aggr services over the public PSN for customers byusing the L2VPN technology.

Service FormsStandardization organizations such as ITU-T, IETF, and MEF stipulate the model frames for E-line services. Table 4-2 lists the model frames. The OptiX PTN 910 adopts the model frame thatis stipulated by MEF.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 4-2 Comparison among L2 Ethernet services stipulated by the standardizationorganizations

Service Type ServiceMultiplexing(Access Side)

TransmissionChannel(NetworkSide)

IETFModel

ITU-TModel

MEFModel

Point-to-pointservice

Line Physicallyisolated

Physicallyisolated

- EPL E-Line

Virtualline

Physicallyisolated

VLAN - EVPL

MPLS VPWS

VLAN Physicallyisolated

-

VLAN -

MPLS VPWS

E-Line Service IllustrationFigure 4-5 illustrates the E-line service that is provided by the OptiX PTN product.

Company A has branches in City 1 and City 3. Company B has branches in City 2 and City 3.Company C has branches in City 1 and City 2. The branches of Company A, Company B, andCompany C require data communication among themselves within the Company. The OptiXPTN equipment can provide E-line services for Company A, Company B, and Company Crespectively to meet the communication requirements. In this case, the OptiX PTN can ensurethat the service data of each company is fully isolated.



4-9

Figure 4-5 E-Line service illustration

Nationwide/Global carrier Ethernet

Metrocarrier Ethernet



Company A

Company B

City 3

Company C

City 1

Company A

Company C Company B

City 2E-Line1E-Line2E-Line3

OptiX PTN 910/912 OptiX PTN 950

E-Aggr Service Illustration

The E-Aggr service is a point-to-point bidirectional convergence service. Figure 4-6 illustratesthe E-Aggr service provided by the PTN products.

To construct a 3G network, an operator needs to converge services from each NodeB and transmitthe converged services to the RNC. The data flow between the NodeB and the RNC is taken asa service. At the convergence node, overall bandwidth is specified for the services to ensure theQoS.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 4-6 E-Aggr service illustration

GE

OptiX PTN 950

RNC

Node B

FE

FE

FE

OptiX PTN 910

4.4 IMA/ATM ServicesThe OptiX PTN 910 provides ATM emulation services by means of PWs in the packet-basedtransport network. The OptiX PTN 910 can access ATM services directly through the E1/cSTM-1 interface or by using the IMA technology.

The OptiX PTN 910 accesses ATM services on the source node, encapsulates ATM cells intoPWs, and transmits the PWs to the sink node. On the sink node, the ATM cells are recovered.In this way, the ATM service emulation is achieved. The OptiX PTN 910 supports the followingmodes to map the ATM cell flow to the PW.

l 1:1 virtual channel connection (VCC) mapping scheme: one VCC is mapped into one PW.

l N:1 VCC mapping scheme: N (N≤32) VCCs are mapped into one PW.

l 1:1 virtual path connection (VPC) mapping scheme: one VPC is mapped into one PW.

l N:1 VPC mapping scheme: N (N≤32) VPCs are mapped into one PW.

It supports the following IMA operations:

l Querying the IMA link state.

l Querying the IMA group state.



4-11

l Adding E1/Fractional E1 links to an IMA group.

l Deleting E1/Fractional E1 links from an IMA group.

ATM specifications supported by the OptiX PTN 910 are listed as follows:

l A maximum of 31 ATM cells can be encapsulated in a PW packet.

l A maximum of 8 IMA groups can be supported by the ML1 and ML1A boards.

l A maximum of 32 IMA groups can be supported by the CD1 boards.

l A maximum of 16 links can be supported in each IMA group.

4.5 CES ServicesIn a packet-based transport network, the CES circuit emulation technology is used totransparently transmit TDM circuit switching data. The OptiX PTN 910 supports emulatedtransparent transmission of the TDM E1/Fractional E1 services.

Application ModelThe OptiX PTN 910 can access CES services by using the PWE3 technology.

The CES service mainly applies to the wireless service and the enterprise private line service.The 2G base station or enterprise private line accesses the OptiX PTN 910 by using the TDMline. The PTN equipment slices and encapsulates the TDM signals into data packets, which arethen transported to the opposite end through the PW in the metropolitan transport network. SeeFigure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Application model of the CES service

BTS BTS

Backbone layer

Convergence layer

Access layer

BSC

OptiX PTN 3900/1900

OptiX PTN 950

OptiX PTN 910/912 CES

IP/MPLS backbone network


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

In the case of a local CES service, it is like that there are two links on the equipment. The CESservice is transmitted upstream over one link and is transmitted downstream over the other link.

Emulation Mode

The OptiX PTN 910 supports CES services of the two modes known as the structured emulationmode and the unstructured emulation mode.

The structured emulation mode is referred to as structure-aware TDM circuit emulation serviceover packet switched network (CESoPSN). In this mode:

l The equipment senses frame structures, frame alignment modes, and timeslots in the TDMcircuit.

l The equipment processes the overhead and extracts the payload in TDM frames. Then, theequipment delivers timeslots of each channel to the packet payload according to a certainsequence. Thus, services of each channel in the packet are fixed and visible.

l Each data packet that carries the CES service loads a fixed number of TDM frames. Theencapsulation time can be configured from 0.125 ms to 5 ms.

l The jitter buffer can be configured from 0.375 ms to 16 ms.

The unstructured emulation mode is referred to as structure-agnostic TDM over packet (SAToP).In this mode:

l The equipment considers the TDM signals as bit streams at a constant rate instead of sensingstructures in the TDM signals. The entire bandwidth of the TDM signals is emulated.

l Overheads and payloads in the TDM signals are transparently transmitted.

l The encapsulation time can be configured from 0.125 ms to 5 ms.

l The jitter buffer can be configured from 0.375 ms to 16 ms.

In the CESoPSN mode, the OptiX PTN 910 provides the compression function for the idle 64kbit/s timeslots in the TDM E1 signals, to save the transmission bandwidth.

Service Clocks

TDM services have high requirements for clock synchronization. The OptiX PTN 910 supportsthe retiming synchronization mode.

In the retiming synchronization mode, the system clock of the PEs are synchronized. Forexample, the BITS clock is provided to the PE at the BSC side, and the clock is transmitted tothe PE at the BTS side through the synchronized network. The system clock of the PE equipmentis used as the service clock (retiming). Thus, all the PEs and CEs are synchronized and the serviceclocks of the TDM services on all the CEs and PEs are synchronized. See Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-8 Retiming synchronization mode of the CES service clock

BTS BSCPE PECES

TDM TDM



4-13

5 Introduction to Functions and Features

About This Chapter

The following describes important functions and features of the equipment.

5.1 MPLSThe equipment uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transport multipletypes of services. The following describes the basic concepts related to the MPLS and applicationof the MPLS supported by the OptiX PTN 910.

5.2 IS-IS Routing ProtocolThe intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol,belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the interior of the autonomoussystem. The OptiX PTN 910 uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the labeldistribution protocols RSVP-TE to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP.

5.3 MPLS SignalingThe MPLS signaling used by the OptiX PTN 910 is classified into the LSP signaling and thePW signaling. The LSP signaling and PW signaling respectively create, maintain, or delete LSPsand PWs.

5.4 PWE3The pseudo wire edge to edge emulation (PWE3) technology is a Layer 2 VPN protocol usedto provide tunnels on the packet switching network (IP/MPLS) to emulate some services, suchas the TDM, IMA and Ethernet services. The PWE3 is used to connect the traditional networkand packet switching network. In this way, networks are extended and resources can be shared.

5.5 IP Tunnels/GRE TunnelsThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the function of carrying PWE3 services such as ATM, CES, E-Aggr and E-Line services over IP tunnel and GRE tunnel. In this way, the ATM, CES, E-Aggrand E-Line emulation services can be transparently transmitted in the MPLS and IP networks.

5.6 xDSLxDSL mainly includes ADSL/ADSL2+ and G.SHDSL. The xDSL network features highbandwidth and low cost. It is applicable to the Offload solution.

5.7 MicrowaveThe equipment supports the packet-based microwave transmission, which greatly enhances thenetworking flexibility and reduces the cost of creating or leasing transmission links.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 5 Introduction to Functions and Features


5-1

5.8 QoSThe equipment provides complete support for DiffServ, which complies with the standards. Byproviding different QoS for the accessed services, network operators can provide differentiatedservices for the customers.

5.9 BFDThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) function to detectthe route layer status through the Hello mechanism.

5 Introduction to Functions and FeaturesOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

5.1 MPLSThe equipment uses the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) technology to transport multipletypes of services. The following describes the basic concepts related to the MPLS and applicationof the MPLS supported by the OptiX PTN 910.

5.1.1 BackgroundMPLS was originally developed to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, MPLSis developed for backbone routers and VPN solutions.

5.1.2 Basic ConceptsBefore learning the MPLS technology, you should learn the basic concepts of the MPLS first.The basic concepts involves the forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distributionprotocol (LDP), and label switched path (LSP).

5.1.3 System StructureThe MPLS system consists of the control plane and the forwarding plane.

5.1.4 MPLS Features of the EquipmentBy using the MPLS technology, the equipment not only greatly increases the packet forwardingspeed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networks such as theATM and Ethernet networks. In addition, the equipment provides better solutions for applicationof the TE, VPN and QoS.

5.1.1 BackgroundMPLS was originally developed to increase the forwarding speed of a router. Currently, MPLSis developed for backbone routers and VPN solutions.

The MPLS is integrated with the powerful Layer 3 routing function of the IP network and thehighly effective forwarding mechanism of the traditional Layer 2 network. The forwarding planeis connection-oriented and the forwarding scheme is similar to the forwarding scheme of theexisting Layer 2 network. Hence, the MPLS can easily realize the seamless combination of IPand Layer 2 networks such as ATM and Ethernet. In addition, the MPLS provides better solutionsfor the application of the traffic engineering (TE), virtual private network (VPN), and quality ofservice (QoS). Thus, the MPLS becomes a criterion for expanding the data network andincreasing the network operability.

To meet the requirements of the transport network to improve the quality of service, theconnectionless feature of the standard MPLS should be simplified, and the OAM and protectioncapabilities should be enhanced. In compliance with the latest international standards, the OptiXPTN 910 supports a series of MPLS features for the transport network.

5.1.2 Basic ConceptsBefore learning the MPLS technology, you should learn the basic concepts of the MPLS first.The basic concepts involves the forwarding equivalence class (FEC), label, label distributionprotocol (LDP), and label switched path (LSP).

FECAs a classification forwarding technology, the MPLS considers the packets of the sameforwarding scheme as a class, which is called an FEC. In the MPLS network, packets in the FECare processed in the same way.



5-3

LabelA label is a short identifier of fixed length and with specific meanings (valid only in the MPLSregion). The label is used to identify the FEC that a packet belongs to. Under certain conditions,for example, when load sharing is required, several labels may correspond to one FEC, but onelabel only indicates one FEC.

The packet headers carry labels and the labels do not contain any topology information. Labelsare locally valid. A label has four bytes, which are encapsulated in the way as shown in Figure5-1.

Figure 5-1 Label encapsulation structure

Label Exp S TTL

0 19 22 23 31

A label has the following four fields:

l Label: 20 bits. The label field indicates the label value and is used as the forwarding pointer.

l Exp: three bits. The Exp field is reserved for experiment and currently used for class ofservice (CoS).

l S: one bit. The MPLS supports the layered labels, or multiple labels. If S is 1, it indicatesthat the label is at the bottom.

l TTL: eight bits. The time to live (TTL) field has the same indication as TTL of IP packets.

As a connection identifier, the label is similar to the VPI/VCI for ATM. In the case of realizingMPLS over Ethernet, the label is encapsulated between the Ethernet frame header and the IPlayer. Figure 5-2 shows the encapsulation location of labels in a packet.

Figure 5-2 Encapsulation location of labels in a packet

Ethernet/PPP header Label Layer 3 data

Ethernet/SONET/SDH packet

Label Distribution ProtocolThe label distribution protocol is the control protocol for MPLS. Similar to the signaling protocolof the traditional network, the label distribution protocol helps creation and maintenance of LSPsand PWs, FEC classification, and label distribution.

MPLS can use several types of label distribution protocol.

l Protocols exclusively stipulated for label distribution, such as LDP and constraint-routinglabel distribution protocol (CR-LDP). The OptiX PTN 910 uses the LDP to create andmaintain PWs.

l Protocols that can be extended to support the label distribution, such as border gatewayprotocol (BGP) and resource reservation protocol (RSVP). The OptiX PTN 910 uses theRSVP-TE protocol to create and maintain LSPs.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

LSP

In an MPLS network, the path involved in an FEC is called an LSP.

LSP is a unidirectional path from the ingress to the egress. Each node on an LSP is a labelswitched router (LSR). According to the data transport direction, adjacent LSRs can be calledupstream LSRs and downstream LSRs.

The LSP are classified into static LSP and dynamic LSP. The static LSPs are manuallyconfigured by the administrator. The dynamic LSPs are created dynamically by the routingprotocol and label distribution protocol.

5.1.3 System StructureThe MPLS system consists of the control plane and the forwarding plane.

The control plane of the MPLS system is based on connectionless services. The control planeof the MPLS system has powerful and flexible routing function, which meets various newapplication requirements on the network.

The forwarding plane is also called a data plane. It adopts the connection-oriented technologyand uses Layer 2 networks such as ATM and Ethernet to forward data. MPLS uses short labelsof fixed length to encapsulate packets, and then to realize fast forwarding of the encapsulatedpackets on the forwarding plane.

5.1.4 MPLS Features of the EquipmentBy using the MPLS technology, the equipment not only greatly increases the packet forwardingspeed but also provides the capability of seamlessly connecting to Layer 2 networks such as theATM and Ethernet networks. In addition, the equipment provides better solutions for applicationof the TE, VPN and QoS.

To ensure the service quality required in the transport network, the OptiX PTN 910 simplifiesthe connectionless-oriented features of MPLS.

l The OptiX PTN 910 does not use penultimate hop popping (PHP), because PHP may causeMPLS OAM information loss.

l The OptiX PTN 910 does not support LSP Merge, because the LSP Merge makes the sourceof a data flow unknown. If the source is unknown, OAM and performance monitoringbecome difficult or even unavailable.

l The OptiX PTN 910 does not support the equal cost multiple path (ECMP), because theECMP makes the continuity check (CC) of OAM and performance monitoring becomemore complicated.

In addition, the OptiX PTN 910 provides complete OAM and proper protection.

l The OptiX PTN 910 provides the MPLS OAM mechanism that complies with ITU-T Y.1711. Thus, it can quickly detect the LSP status.

l The OptiX PTN 910 provides the protection switching mechanism that complies with ITU-T Y.1720 and ITU-T G.8131. The equipment provides not only FRR protection but alsoend-to-end transport protection for LSPs.

Table 5-1 lists the MPLS features supported by the OptiX PTN 910.



5-5

Table 5-1 MPLS features supported by the OptiX PTN 910

Feature Description

Basic MPLS functions The equipment supports basic MPLSfunctions and service forwarding. Theequipment uses the LDP and the RSVP-TEprotocol to create and maintain the PWs andLSPs respectively.

The equipment uses the LSP tunneltechnology and the pseudo wire emulationedge to edge (PWE3) technology to form anMPLS network, where multiple services canbe accessed.

The equipment supports static LSPs anddynamic LSPs.

MPLS OAM The equipment supports MPLS OAM incompliance with ITU-T Y.1711.

The equipment supports the LSP ping, LSPtraceroute and PW ping.

MPLS protection The equipment supports the LSP RR and LSPFRR.

The equipment supports LSP 1:1 protectionscheme and 1+1 protection scheme.

MPLS-TE The equipment supports explicit bandwidthallocation and trial control.

Others The equipment supports the DiffServ MPLSQoS.

5.2 IS-IS Routing ProtocolThe intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) routing protocol, a link state protocol,belongs to the internal gateway protocol and is applicable to the interior of the autonomoussystem. The OptiX PTN 910 uses the IS-IS routing protocol, which is used with the labeldistribution protocols RSVP-TE to realize the dynamic creation of the MPLS LSP.

The IS-IS routing protocol used by the OptiX PTN 910 creates and synchronizes the link statedatabase (LSDB) through routing protocol packets, such as link state protocol data units (PDUs).Based on the LSDB and link overhead, the equipment uses the optimized shortest path first (SPF)algorithm to generate the routing table, and uses the IS-IS TE of the IS-IS routing protocol togenerate the traffic engineering database (TEDB). The TEDB and routing table are the basis todynamically create the MPLS LSP. The TEDB computes the route for the MPLS LSP to travel.The RSVP-TE and LDP protocol packets are forwarded based on the routing table to realizelabel distribution. In this way, the MPLS LSP is dynamically created.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following features of the IS-IS routing protocol, that is, threetypes of IS-IS routing protocol packets, optimized SPF algorithm, link overhead, and IS-IS TE.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Three Types of IS-IS Routing Protocol Packets

The IS-IS routing protocol belongs to the network layer of the OSI protocol model. The IS-ISrouting protocol runs directly at the data link layer. When the IS-IS routing protocol is processed,the decapsulation of the network layer is absent. With the preceding feature, the IS-IS routingprotocol is more applicable to the PTN transport network that uses the MPLS packet switchingtechnology.

The IS-IS routing protocol packet uses the uniform encapsulation format. The length of thepacket can be changed and extended. The complexity of the protocol is decreased, because thetypes of the protocol packets are few. Thus, the running is more reliable and efficient.

The OptiX PTN 910 realizes the following three types of IS-IS routing protocol packets:

l Hello packet

Hello packets are used to construct and maintain neighbor relations between network nodes.Hence, Hello packets are also called IS-to-IS hello (IIH) PDUs.

l Link state PDU packet

Link state PDU packets are used to exchange the link state information. In a network wherethe IS-IS routing protocol is used, each network node generates a link state PDU packet.The link state PDU packet contains all the link state information of this network node. Eachnetwork node collects all the link state PDU packets within the local region and betweenregions to generate its own LSDB.

l SNP packet

Sequence number PDU (SNP) packets describe the link state PDUs in all or part of theLSDB. The SNP is used to synchronize and maintain the LSDB of each network node inthe PTN network.

Optimized SPF Algorithm

The IS-IS routing protocol realized by the OptiX PTN 910 uses the optimized SPF algorithmfor route computation and update. Thus, when the topology is changed, the resources (networkbandwidth, processing capability of network nodes, and memory) for updating the new routeare few, and thus the convergence rate of the entire network is increased.

Link Overhead

The OptiX PTN 910 supports manual setting of the link overhead to control the path involvedin the dynamically created MPLS LSP.

IS-IS TE

In the case that MPLS is used to construct the LSP, the traffic engineering information of all thelinks in the local region should be known. The IS-IS TE realized by the OptiX PTN 910 supportsthe construction of the MPLS LSP. By using the IS-IS routing protocol, the OptiX PTN 910obtains the traffic engineering information (including the link utilization and the link overhead)of all the links in the network, constructs and synchronizes the TEDB, and uses the constrainedshortest path first (CSPF) algorithm based on the TEDB to compute the route for the MPLS LSPto travel.



5-7

5.3 MPLS SignalingThe MPLS signaling used by the OptiX PTN 910 is classified into the LSP signaling and thePW signaling. The LSP signaling and PW signaling respectively create, maintain, or delete LSPsand PWs.

LSP SignalingThe OptiX PTN 910 uses the RSVP-TE protocol as the LSP signaling.

The RSVP protocol is originally developed for the network QoS function. It reserves resourcesfor particular services on the network to ensure the service quality of services. After TE wasdeveloped, the RSVP protocol was extended to create LSP. In this way, TE can be easily realized.

The RSVP-TE protocol used by the OptiX PTN 910 has the following functions:

l Supports various messages and objects of the RSVP-TE protocol.

l Supports the shared-explicit (SE) style to reserve resources. In the case of the SE style,resources are reserved for a specified group of transmitters, which share the reservedresources.

l Supports refreshing, fast re-transmission, and confirmation of the software status.

PW SignalingThe OptiX PTN 910 uses the LDP protocol as the PW signaling.

The LDP is a control and signaling protocol for MPLS.

The LDP protocol used by the OptiX PTN 910 has the following functions:

l Supports extension of the LDP protocol by the PWE3.

l Supports the extended neighbor discovery mechanism.

l Supports the label distributing scheme of the downstream on demand.

l Supports the ordered label control scheme.

l Supports the liberal retention mode.

5.4 PWE3The pseudo wire edge to edge emulation (PWE3) technology is a Layer 2 VPN protocol usedto provide tunnels on the packet switching network (IP/MPLS) to emulate some services, suchas the TDM, IMA and Ethernet services. The PWE3 is used to connect the traditional networkand packet switching network. In this way, networks are extended and resources can be shared.

Basic ConceptsAs a technology for carrying end-to-end Layer 2 services, PWE3 belongs to the point-to-pointL2VPN. At the two provider edges (PEs) of a network, the LDP is used as the signaling andtunnels are used to emulate various Layer 2 services (such as the Layer 2 data packets and bitflow) at the customer edge (CE). In this way, the Layer 2 data at the CE end is transparentlytransmitted in the network.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

PWE3 is used to create point-to-point channels, which are isolated from each other. The Layer2 packets from users are transparently transmitted in PWs. For PE equipment, the mappingrelation between user access interfaces and PWs is fixed once the PW connection is set up. Forprovider (P) equipment, MPLS packets are forwarded according to the MPLS labels. The Layer2 user packets encapsulated in the MPLS packets are not processed.

Typical Application

PWE3 is used to integrate the original access schemes with the existing IP backbone networks.In this way, repeated network construction is reduced and the operation expenditure is saved.

Figure 5-3 shows the typical application scenario of PWE3.

Figure 5-3 Typical application scenario of PWE3

NodeB

RNC

BSC

PWE3PWE3

E1, STM-1 interface

E1 interface

ATM, GE interface

IMA E1, FE interface

PWE3

NodeB

BTS

OptiX PTN 950OptiX PTN 912/910

Equipment Supporting Capability

Table 5-2 lists the capabilities of the equipment of supporting PWE3.

Table 5-2 Capabilities of the equipment of supporting PWE3

Feature Description

Serviceencapsulation

Performs PWE3 encapsulation of the TDM E1, ATM/IMA, E-Aggr andE-Line services into PW packets.

PSN carrying l Adopts MPLS to carry PW packets.

l Adopts two-layer MPLS labels. The inner label is the PW label andthe outer label is the MPLS tunnel label.



5-9

Feature Description

Signalingprotocol

Supports static PWs and dynamic PWs, and adopts the LDP protocol toset up and maintain dynamic PWs.

5.5 IP Tunnels/GRE TunnelsThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the function of carrying PWE3 services such as ATM, CES, E-Aggr and E-Line services over IP tunnel and GRE tunnel. In this way, the ATM, CES, E-Aggrand E-Line emulation services can be transparently transmitted in the MPLS and IP networks.

NOTE

This following describes how the emulation services (ATM service as an example) are encapsulated whenthey are carried over IP tunnel and GRE tunnel.

In the MPLS network, the PWE3 technology is used to realize ATM emulation services. Figure5-4 shows the encapsulation mode of the ATM emulation services.

Figure 5-4 ATM PWE3 services carried over MPLS tunnels

ATM switch

MPLS network

ATME1

ATMPWE3

PW LabelLSP LabelEthernet

ATME1

ATM switch

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

To realize ATM emulation services over an IP network, the OptiX PTN 910 supports carryingATM PWE3 services over IP tunnels, GRE tunnels in compliance with RFC 4023. As shown inFigure 5-5 and Figure 5-6, even though the IP network does not support MPLS, the ATMemulation services can be realized.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 5-5 ATM PWE3 services carried over IP tunnels

ATM switch

IP network

ATME1

ATMPWE3

PW LabelIP

Ethernet

ATME1

ATM switchRouter

ATMPWE3

PW LabelIP

Ethernet

Router

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

Figure 5-6 ATM PWE3 services carried over GRE tunnels

ATM switch

IP network

ATMPWE3

PW LabelGRE

ATME1

ATM switchRouterRouter

IPEthernet

ATMPWE3

PW LabelGRE

IPEthernet

ATME1

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

NOTE

DCN packets can be transparently transported over the IP tunnel or GRE tunnel. When the DCN packetspass through a third-party network, the DCN packets are transported in an end-to-end manner.

5.6 xDSLxDSL mainly includes ADSL/ADSL2+ and G.SHDSL. The xDSL network features highbandwidth and low cost. It is applicable to the Offload solution.

As the mobile services become diversified, bandwidth required at base stations is increased.Moreover, proportion of traditional voice services in the mobile services is gradually reduced.If only E1 lines are used for transmitting the mobile services, the line cost is relatively huge.Thus, on the base station side, services accessed by the base station can be divided. Thetraditional voice services are still transmitted by using the E1 lines to ensure high QoS, lowdelay, and high reliability. The packet services, such as the HSDPA services, are transmitted byusing the xDSL technology.

In the uplink direction, base station services are accessed to the OptiX PTN 910. The equipmentperforms the ATM PWE3 emulation processing for the services, encapsulate the services, andthen sends the services to the RNC over the xDSL network. In the downlink direction, theservices are processed in the reverse order.



5-11

ADSL/ADSL2+ has the following features:

l The working mode of ADSL/ADSL2+ is the asymmetrical mode. ADSL/ADSL2+ ismainly used in downstream transmission. For example, ADSL/ADSL2+ is used in the caseof family user services.

l ADSL/ADSL2+ features a high rate and is suitable for long-haul transmission.

l The launched power is decreased with the decrease of service flows.

G.SHDSL has the following features:

l The working mode of G.SHDSL is the symmetrical mode. G.SHDSL is mainly used inbidirectional transmission. For example, G.SHDSL is used in the case of video conference.

Based on the forwarding modes adopted by the xDSL network, the application scenarios of theOffload solution can be classified into the following:

l xDSL network that forwards services based on the ETH mode

l xDSL network that forwards services based on the IP mode

Application Scenario Where the xDSL Network Forwards Services Based on theETH Mode

Figure 5-7 shows the application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based onthe ETH mode.

Figure 5-7 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the ETHmode

NodeB RNCATME1

ATME1

ATME1

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

DSLAM

xDSL WMS

ATMPWE3

EthernetAAL5ATMxDSL

MPLS LabelPW Label

ATMPWE3

EthernetMPLS Label

PW Label

In this scenario, the xDSL network realizes the Layer 2 forwarding according to the ETH packets.By using the MPLS tunnels, the HSDPA services can be transmitted.

Application Scenario Where the xDSL Network Forwards Services Based on the IPMode

Figure 5-8, Figure 5-9 and Figure 5-10 show the application scenarios where the xDSL networkforwards services based on the IP mode.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 5-8 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IPmode (IP tunnel)

NodeB RNCATME1

AAL5ATMxDSL ATM

E1

ATME1

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

DSLAM

xDSL WMS

ATMPWE3

EthernetIP

PW Label

ATMPWE3

EthernetIP

PW Label

Figure 5-9 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IPmode (GRE tunnel)

NodeB RNCATME1

AAL5ATMxDSL ATM

E1

ATME1

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

DSLAM

xDSL WMS

ATMPWE3

EthernetIP

PW LabelGRE

ATMPWE3

EthernetIP

PW LabelGRE

Figure 5-10 Application scenario where the xDSL network forwards services based on the IPmode (IP Tunnel and UDP PW)

NodeB

xDSL WMS

RNCATME1

ATMPWE3

EthernetAAL5ATMxDSL

ATMPWE3

Ethernet

ATME1

ATME1

OptiX PTN 910/950/912

IP IP

UDP UDP

DSLAM

In the scenario, the xDSL network realizes the forwarding of IP packets based on the IP header.Thus, IP tunnels or GRE tunnels are used to carry the packets. With the IP Tunnel used, theMPLS PW label can be replaced with the UDP header.



5-13

5.7 MicrowaveThe equipment supports the packet-based microwave transmission, which greatly enhances thenetworking flexibility and reduces the cost of creating or leasing transmission links.

The packet-based microwave features of the OptiX PTN 910 are mainly used to transmit servicesof the packet-based mobile base stations. These features can realize coexistence of packetservices and traditional TDM services. IP services can be encapsulated into microwave framesfor transmission.

In the case of the packet-based microwave features, the OptiX PTN 910 supports the adaptivemodulation (AM) function, automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function, and 1+1 hotstandby (HSB)/frequency diversity (FD)/space diversity (SD) protection functions. To supportthe microwave feature, the OptiX PTN 910 must be used with the OptiX RTN 600 ODU. TheOptiX PTN 910 supports the SP/HP ODU and 6 GHz SPA ODU.

AM FunctionIn the case of AM, the modulation mode of a system can be adjusted according to the channelquality in a real-time manner.

In the case of voice and real-time data services that feature high QoS, high reliability is requiredfor the system. In the case of non real-time services, large capacities are required for the system.Thus, microwave systems should feature large capacities and strong anti-interferencecapabilities. AM is an effective manner to improve the usability and bandwidth utilization of airinterface links.

If the bandwidth of an air interface link is not changed, when the quality of the air interface linkis in good condition (for example, during a bright day), the equipment can use the high-modulation mode to transmit more user services. In this way, the transmission efficiency andspectrum utilization of the system are improved. When the quality of the air interface is in badcondition (for example, during a rainy or foggy day), the equipment can use the low-modulationmode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link. In the way, the transmission qualityof important user data is ensured and usability of links for data of high priorities is maintained.

To ensure that no bit error is introduced to the transmitted services when the modulation modeare switched, the AM module divides user services into different levels. Each level coversinformation about the modulation mode, service type, and ratio of the bandwidth occupied byeach type of the service. According to the evaluation of the link quality and the service level,the AM module completes the modulation mode switching, service switching, and servicescheduling.

The AM module performs the following operations to achieve the AM functions.l The AM module evaluates the availability of the air interface link by using the detection

mechanism of the receive end. According to the evaluation result, the AM module generatesinstructions for switching the modulation mode and then sends the instructions to thetransmit end through the feedback channel.

l Without changing the bandwidth at the air interface, the transmit end automatically changesthe modulation mode of the services and then sends the information together with theservices to the receive end.

l After the receive end extracts the information, it demodulates the services based on theinformation.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

ATPC Function

If the ATPC technology is used, within the range of the ATPC, output power of the transmittercan automatically trace the receive level fluctuation of the receive end. The ATPC technologycan reduce the interference to the adjacent system and the residual bit error rate (BER).

1+1 HSB

HSB provides protection at the equipment level. It mainly provides 1+1 protection for theintermediate frequency (IF) board and the ODU to realize the dual fed and selective receivingfunction.

A microwave service configured with 1+1 HSB is considered as an example to describe the 1+1 HSB protection principle.

Before the switching

In the transmit direction (see Figure 5-11)

Figure 5-11 1+1 HSB protection principle (in the transmit direction before the switching)

Service processing

board

Switching board

Active IF board

Standby IF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Combiner

Antenna

1. The service processing board sends received service signals to the switching board.

2. The switching board sends the service signals to both the active and the standby IF boards.

3. The active and standby IF boards send the processed analog IF signals to the active andstandby ODUs.

4. The active ODU sends the radio frequency (RF) signals to the antenna through thecombiner. The standby ODU does not send the RF signals.

In the receive direction (see Figure 5-12)

Figure 5-12 1+1 HSB protection principle (in the receive direction before the switching)

Service processing

boardSwitching board

Active IF board

Standby IF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Combiner

Antenna

1. The combiner divides the RF signals received from the antenna into two channels and thensends them to the active and standby ODUs.



5-15

2. The active and standby ODUs send the processed analog IF signals to the active and standbyIF boards.

3. The active and standby IF boards send the service signals to the switching board.4. After the switching board selectively receives the service signals sent from the active IF

board, it sends the received signals to the service processing board.5. The service processing board sends received service signals to the opposite equipment.

After the switching

If the switching occurs in the transmit direction, the standby ODU sends the RF signals to theantenna through the combiner; the active ODU does not send the RF signals.

If the switching occurs in the receive direction, the switching board receives the services signalssent from the standby IF board.

1+1 FDAt the transmit end, two channels with a certain frequency spacing are used to send signals. Thereceive end receives signals from the channels and selects the channel of better signals to reducethe impact of fading on the signal transmission. The 1+1 FD protection supports the switchingbased on the selection of signals on different channels. This type of switching is called thechannel-side switching, which does not damage services and thus is also called hitless switchingmode (HSM). The 1+1 FD protection also supports the equipment switching whose realizationprinciple is the same as the realization principle of the 1+1 HSB. This type of switching is calledthe hot standby (HSB) switching.

A microwave service configured with 1+1 FD is considered as an example to describe the 1+1FD protection principle.


Figure 5-13 1+1 FD protection principle (in the transmit direction)

Service processing

board

Switching board

Active IF board

StandbyIF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Antenna

Antenna

f1

f2

1. The service processing board sends received service signals to the switching board.2. The switching board sends the service signals to both the active and the standby IF boards.3. The active and standby IF boards send the processed analog IF signals to the active and

standby ODU unit.4. The active and standby ODUs output and send RF signals of different frequencies to the

antenna.



Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 5-14 1+1 FD protection principle (in the receive direction)

Service processing

boardSwitching

board

Active IF board

Standby IF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Antenna

Antenna

f1

f2

1. The antenna sends the received RF signals to the active and standby ODUs.2. The active and standby ODUs send the processed analog IF signals to the active and standby

IF boards.3. The active IF board selects a channel of better signals and then sends the signals to the

switching board.4. After the switching board selectively receives the service signals sent from the active IF


NOTE

If switching conditions are available in the receive direction, the switching board receives the servicessignals sent from the standby IF board.

1+1 SDThe transmit end only sends one signal. The receive end uses two antennas at different heightsto receive signals of the same frequency, and it selects the signal of better quality to reduce theimpact of fading on the signal transmission. The 1+1 SD protection supports the switching basedon the selection of signals on different channels. This type of switching is called the channel-side switching, which does not damage services and thus is also called HSM. The 1+1 SDprotection also supports the equipment switching whose realization principle is the same as therealization principle of the 1+1 HSB protection. This type of switching is called the HSBswitching.

A microwave service configured with 1+1 SD is considered as an example to describe the 1+1SD protection principle.


Figure 5-15 1+1 SD protection principle (in the transmit direction)

Service processing

board

Switching board

Active IF board

Standby IF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Antenna

Antenna



5-17

1. The service processing board sends received service signals to the switching board.2. The switching board sends the service signals to both the active and the standby IF boards.3. The active and standby IF boards send the processed analog IF signals to the active and

standby ODU unit.4. The active ODU outputs and sends the RF signals to the antenna through the combiner.

The standby ODU does not send the RF signals.


Figure 5-16 1+1 SD protection principle (in the receive direction)

Switching board

Service processing

board

Active IF board

Standby IF board

Active ODU

Standby ODU

Antenna

Antenna

1. The antenna sends the received RF signals to the active and standby ODUs.2. The active and standby ODUs send the processed analog IF signals to the active and standby

IF boards.3. The active IF board selects the channel of better signals and then sends the signals to the

switching board.4. After the switching board selectively receives the service signals sent from the active IF


NOTE

If switching conditions are available in the receive direction, the switching board receives the servicessignals sent from the standby IF board.

5.8 QoSThe equipment provides complete support for DiffServ, which complies with the standards. Byproviding different QoS for the accessed services, network operators can provide differentiatedservices for the customers.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports a QoS mechanism that includes flow classification, CAR, andqueue scheduling.

Flow ClassificationThe flow classification indicates that data packets are classified into several priorities or serviceclasses. For example, if the first six bits of the differentiated services code point (DSCP) ToS


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

domain are used for the flow classification, the flow can be classified into a maximum of 64classes. After the flow is classified, other QoS features can be used for different classes. Flowclassification is the prerequisite to implementing the QoS policy for packets.

The equipment supports simple flow classification.

Simple flow classification:

In the case of simple flow classification, priorities of the external packets and the internal packetsare mutually mapped based on the DSCP value of the IP packet, the IP priority, the EXP domainvalue of the MPLS packet, or the 802.1p value of the VLAN packet. In this case, the packetsare colored.

Purpose of simple flow classification:

The simple flow classification is applied to the internal nodes of the DS domain. In the same DSdomain, rules of simple flow classification for all the nodes are the same. The simple flowclassification realizes the mutual mapping between the original priority of the packets in thenetwork and the internal priority of the equipment. In this way, packets can be transmitted inthe equipment according to the configured priority. Compared with the complex flowclassification, the simple flow classification is simple in terms of the form and configuration andmakes the QoS configuration of each node in the DS domain simplified.

Flow classification supported by the equipment:

The equipment supports simple flow classification for the VLAN packets, IP packets and MPLSpackets. Moreover, the equipment supports simple flow classification at the Ethernet port.

CARCAR is a method used to limit the rate of accessed packets according to the four preset parametersof the token bucket. The purpose of CAR is to mark accessed packets with colors (or label thepackets), and to limit the rate of accessed packets.

The CAR provides the following two key functions.

l Labeling: Realized by color marking and re-labeling.

l Traffic rate limiting: Realized by the specific action taken on the packets after they aremarked with colors.

OptiX PTN 910 supports the color marking mode of color-blind mode. The current rate ofpackets is compared with the committed information rate (CIR) and peak information rate (PIR)of the token bucket. The packets that exceed the PIR are marked in red. The packets that exceedthe CIR but are within the PIR are marked in yellow. The packets that are within both the CIRand PIR are marked in green.

Traffic rate limiting determines whether to discard some colored packets, and thus limits theaccess rate of the traffic.

The default rule is that the red packets are discarded and the yellow and green packets are allowedto pass. The actions can also be manually set for the three-color packets.

NOTE

The token bucket is a technology used to realize the CAR functions. In IETF Recommendations, the singlerate three color marker (srTCM) or two rate three color marker (trTCM) algorithm is used to assess packets.According to the assessment result, the packets are marked with colors and labeled with different discardingpriorities.



5-19

Queue SchedulingBy using different flow classification methods, packets are sent to queues with different prioritiesfor scheduling. The equipment supports using the SP + weighted fair queuing (WFQ) mode toschedule the queues after the flow classification. In the case of CS7, CS6, EF, and BE services,the SP mode is used. In the case of AF services, the WFQ mode is used.

5.9 BFDThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) function to detectthe route layer status through the Hello mechanism.

BFD is a simple Hello protocol. In many aspects, it is similar to the neighbor detection of therouting protocol. A pair of systems periodically sends detection packets on the channel on whichsession between the two systems is created. If a system does not receive any detection packetfrom the opposite end in a specific period of time, the system considers that a failure has occurredin some part of the bidirectional channel to the adjacent system.

The OptiX PTN 910 adopts the asynchronous mode to realize the BFD. In asynchronous mode,the equipment at two ends of a channel can periodically send BFD control packets to each other.If certain equipment fails to receive the BFD control packet sent from the opposite equipmentwithin the detection period of time, it considers that the channel is faulty.

The OptiX PTN 910 performs BFD at intervals of 1 second.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

6 Protection

About This Chapter

The OptiX PTN 910 provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

NOTE

In addition, OptiX PTN 910 supports microwave protection. For details, see 5.7 Microwave.

6.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe equipment level protection mainly involves the 1+1 protection for the power supply. Thepower board of the OptiX PTN 910 supports two power supplies for 1+1 hot backup.

6.2 Network Level ProtectionThe network level protection includes the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection, Offloadprotection, LMSP protection, Ethernet LAG protection, ML-PPP protection, IMA protection,and LSP FRR protection.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 6 Protection


6-1

6.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe equipment level protection mainly involves the 1+1 protection for the power supply. Thepower board of the OptiX PTN 910 supports two power supplies for 1+1 hot backup.

The PIU board of the OptiX PTN 910 has two independent power supplies for hot backup. Whenan input power supply fails, the other power supply can work normally to provide power for theequipment.

6.2 Network Level ProtectionThe network level protection includes the MPLS tunnel 1+1 and 1:1 protection, Offloadprotection, LMSP protection, Ethernet LAG protection, ML-PPP protection, IMA protection,and LSP FRR protection.

6.2.1 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 and 1+1 ProtectionIn the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel 1:1 and 1+1 protection, the protection tunnelprotects the service that is transported in the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty,the service is switched to the protection tunnel. In the case of 1+1 protection, services are duallyfed and selectively received. In the case of 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received.

6.2.2 Offload ProtectionIn the case of the Offload solution, when the xDSL network that carries HSDPA services isfaulty, the equipment can switch the HSDPA services to the leased lines or microwave links fortransmission, and thus realizing protection for the HSDPA services.

6.2.3 LMSPIn the linear multiplex section protection (LMSP), the protection path protects the service thatis transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched tothe protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism,and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. The LMSPprotection scheme is designed for STM-1 interface, for examples, the boards that providechannelized STM-1 ports (accessing ML-PPP).

6.2.4 LAG ProtectionLink aggregation means that a group of physical Ethernet ports are bundled together (that is,several GE ports are bundled as a group, or several FE ports are bundled as a group) to form alogical port. Link aggregation increases the bandwidth and provides link protection.

6.2.5 ML-PPP ProtectionThe multilink point-to-point protocol (ML-PPP) bundles multiple PPP links to provide thefunctions of bandwidth increase, load sharing, and backup.

6.2.6 IMA ProtectionInverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) demultiplexes a concentrated flow of ATM cells intomultiple lower-rate links, and at the remote end multiplexes these lower-rate links to recover theoriginal concentrated flow of ATM cells. In this way, multiple lower-rate links are flexibly andconveniently multiplexed.

6.2.7 FRR ProtectionIn the fast reroute (FRR) protection, extra resources are reserved for protection. FRR providesfast local protection. FRR is usually deployed in a network that requires high reliability. Whena local failure occurs in the network, FRR is able to quickly switch the services to a bypasstunnel. In this case, the impact on data services is very small.

6 ProtectionOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

6.2.1 MPLS Tunnel 1:1 and 1+1 ProtectionIn the multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) tunnel 1:1 and 1+1 protection, the protection tunnelprotects the service that is transported in the working tunnel. When the working tunnel is faulty,the service is switched to the protection tunnel. In the case of 1+1 protection, services are duallyfed and selectively received. In the case of 1:1 protection, services are singly fed and received.

In the MPLS tunnel protection, the APS protocol information is transported through theprotection tunnel, so that the protocol state information and the switching state information areexchanged between the two ends. The equipment at the two ends performs service switchingaccording to the protocol state and switching state.

NOTE

l The MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection may be bidirectional or unidirectional. The MPLS 1:1 protection canonly be bidirectional.

l In the case of unidirectional MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, the destination end receives packets fromthe protection tunnel when detecting any fault of the working tunnel. In this case, switching based onthe APS protocol is not necessary.

MPLS Tunnel 1+1 ProtectionFigure 6-1 shows the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection supported by the equipment.

Figure 6-1 MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection

E1

BTS OptiX PTN 3900/1900

OptiX PTN 950OptiX PTN 912

/910

Working tunnel

Protection tunnel

In the case of MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection, services are dually fed and selectively received.When the working tunnel fails, the receive end selects services in the protection tunnel. In thisway, services are switched.

l Detection method:– At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in milliseconds.

– At the link layer, the detection is conducted by MPLS OAM in 10 ms.

l Switching process: The receive end selects services according to the link state.

MPLS Tunnel 1:1 ProtectionFigure 6-2 shows the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection supported by the equipment.



6-3

Figure 6-2 MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection

E1

BTS OptiX PTN 3900/1900

OptiX PTN 950OptiX PTN 912

/910

Working tunnel

Protection tunnel

In the case of MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection, services are transported in the working tunnel. Whenthe working tunnel fails, services are switched to the protection tunnel. In this case, services aresingly fed and received. The APS protocol information is transported through the protectiontunnel, so that the protocol state information and the switching state information are exchangedbetween the two ends. The equipment at the two ends switches and selects the services accordingto the protocol state and switching state.

l Detection method:– At the physical layer, the loss of signal is detected in milliseconds.

– At the link layer, the detection is conducted by MPLS OAM in 10 ms.

l Switching process: After a negotiation using the APS protocol, the transmit end switchesthe service to the protection tunnel, and the receive end selects the service from theprotection tunnel.

Protection ParametersTable 6-1 lists the parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection.

Table 6-2 lists the parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection.

Table 6-1 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1:1 protection

SwitchingType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

SwitchingDelayTime

DefaultWTR Time

1:1 dual-endedswitching

Non-revertive

APS ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0by default)

-


Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0by default)

5 minutes


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

SwitchingType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

SwitchingDelayTime

DefaultWTR Time

Switching conditions (any of the following conditions triggers the switching):l The board has a hardware or software failure.

l A cold reset is performed for the board.

l A switching command is manually issued.

l An SF occurs or disappears.

l An SD occurs or disappears.

l The WTR time expires.

l The OAM alarms are raised.

NOTE

If the MPLS Tunnel in the protection group passes through the xDSL network (Offload scenarios), theMPLS Tunnel 1:1 protection switching time is less than 100 ms.

Table 6-2 Parameters of the MPLS tunnel 1+1 protection

SwitchingType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

SwitchingDelay Time

Default WTRTime

1+1 single-endedswitching

Non-revertive

- ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

-

1+1 dual-endedswitching

Non-revertive

APS ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

-


Revertive - ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

5 minutes


Revertive APS ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

5 minutes


l A cold reset is performed for the board.


l An SF occurs or disappears.

l An SD occurs or disappears.

l The WTR time expires.

l The OAM alarms are raised.



6-5

NOTE

If the MPLS Tunnel in the protection group passes through the xDSL network (Offload scenarios), theMPLS Tunnel 1+1 protection switching time is less than 100 ms.

6.2.2 Offload ProtectionIn the case of the Offload solution, when the xDSL network that carries HSDPA services isfaulty, the equipment can switch the HSDPA services to the leased lines or microwave links fortransmission, and thus realizing protection for the HSDPA services.

To ensure that HSDPA services can operate in a secure and reliable manner, the working linkof the HSDPA service should be switched to the protection link when the working link fails. SeeFigure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Offload protection

xDSL wholesale

OptiX PTN 910

OptiX PTN 950

NodeB

RNC

IMA E1

Leased Line/Microwave

HSDPA service

R99 service

In Figure 6-3, signals transmitted by NodeB are divided into HSDPA signals and R99 signals.The HSDPA signals are transmitted to the RNC over the xDSL leased network. The R99 signalsare transmitted to the RNC over leased lines (LLs) or the microwave network.

When the xDSL network fails, the HSDPA service need be switched to the LL or the MPnetwork. In the meantime, since the priority of the HSDPA service should is the lowest to realizethe best-effort transmission of the HSDPA service, the R99 service transmitted in the in the LLor the microwave network is also ensured.

For the Offload protection, the tunnel that transmits the HSDPA signal can be considered as theworking tunnel. The tunnel that transmits the R99 signal can be considered as the protectiontunnel.

l When the xDSL network forwards services based on the Ethernet mode, the MPLS tunnelis adopted in the xDSL network to carry the HSDPA service. The MPLS Tunnel 1+1/1:1protection is adopted to protect the HSDPA service. In this case, the FFD detection period


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

for the working tunnel is suggested to be 20ms. The protection switching time is less than100 ms.

l When the xDSL network forwards services based on the IP mode, the MPLS tunnel isadopted in the xDSL network to carry the HSDPA service. The MPLS tunnel on the LL/microwave network is used as the protection tunnel. The bidirectional forwarding detection(BFD) mechanism is adopted to detect defects. When a fault occurs in the xDSL network,the BFD mechanism can quickly detect the fault to trigger the APS protection switching.In this case, only 1:1 revertive protection can be used.

6.2.3 LMSPIn the linear multiplex section protection (LMSP), the protection path protects the service thatis transported in the working path. When the working path is faulty, the service is switched tothe protection path. The 1+1 protection adopts the dual fed and selective receiving mechanism,and the 1:1 protection adopts the single fed and single receiving mechanism. The LMSPprotection scheme is designed for STM-1 interface, for examples, the boards that providechannelized STM-1 ports (accessing ML-PPP).

1+1 LMSPFigure 6-4 shows the 1+1 LMSP supported by the equipment.

Figure 6-4 1+1 LMSP

NE1 NE2

Working channel

Protection channel

Selective receivingDual fed

In the case of 1+1 LMSP, services are dually fed and selectively received. When the workingpath is faulty, the receive end selects the service from the protection path. In this way, the serviceswitching is realized.

l Detection method: The LOS alarm, LOF alarm, MS_AIS alarm, B1 bit errors, or B2 biterrors are detected at the physical layer.


1:1 LMSPFigure 6-5 shows the 1:1 LMSP supported by the equipment.



6-7

Figure 6-5 1:1 LMSP

NE1 NE2

Working channel

Protection channel

Single receivingSingle fed

In the case of 1:1 LMSP, services are transported through the working path. When the workingpath fails, services are switched to the protection path. In this case, services are singly fed andreceived. The APS protocol information is transported through the protection path, so that theprotocol state information and the switching state information are exchanged between the twoends. The equipment at the two ends switches and selects the services according to the protocolstate and switching state.

l Detection method: The LOS alarm, LOF alarm, MS_AIS alarm, B1 bit errors, or B2 biterrors are detected at the physical layer.


Protection Parameters

Table 6-3 lists the parameters of the 1+1 and 1:1 LMSP.

Table 6-3 Parameters of the 1+1 and 1:1 LMSP

SwitchingType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

SwitchingDelay Time

Default WTRTime


Non-revertive

Notrequired

≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

-


Non-revertive

APS ≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

-


Revertive Notrequired

≤ 50 ms 0s to 10s (0 bydefault)

5 minute



5 minute



5 minute


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

SwitchingType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

SwitchingDelay Time

Default WTRTime


l A warm or cold reset is performed for the board.


6.2.4 LAG ProtectionLink aggregation means that a group of physical Ethernet ports are bundled together (that is,several GE ports are bundled as a group, or several FE ports are bundled as a group) to form alogical port. Link aggregation increases the bandwidth and provides link protection.

Ethernet link aggregation group (LAG) protection provides load sharing and non load sharingamong ports. The system realizes inter-board and intra-board LAG protection. In the case of afailure on any link, the service is switched to other physical links with the media of the samecategory in the LAG. The links in an LAG are not distinguished by the working and protectionattributes.

Figure 6-6 shows the Ethernet LAG protection supported by the equipment.

Figure 6-6 Ethernet LAG protection

Access Switching board

Ethernet board

AccessSwitching board

Service detection point Service detection point

Ethernet board

Ethernet board

Ethernet board

......

Intra-board LAG Inter-board

LAG

Link aggregation has the following advantages:

l The link bandwidth is increased.

l The link reliability is improved. The service flow on the failed link can be transmitted byother available links.

l Load sharing is provided. Load sharing is based on the LAG algorithm.

l Non load sharing is provided. This provides a hot standby scheme for the links.

The equipment supports the following two link aggregation modes:



6-9

l Manual aggregation

l Static aggregation

For failed links, the equipment supports the following revertive modes:

l Revertive

l Non-revertive

The equipment supports the following sharing options:

l Load sharing

l Non load sharing

The equipment supports the inter-board and intra-board LAG protection.

Manual Aggregation

The manual bundling of ports does not require the link aggregation control protocol (LACP).

On the OptiX PTN 910, multiple physical Ethernet ports can be bundled as one logical port.With the port bundling technology, the transmission bandwidth between equipment can beincreased without a hardware upgrade, and the link reliability is also improved.

After the setting of an LAG, if the load sharing is adopted, the equipment automatically enablesthe load sharing among the physical ports that are bundled as a logical port. When one physicalport fails, the traffic on the failed port is automatically shared by other physical ports. When thefailed port recovers, the traffic is reallocated to ensure that the load is shared among all ports inthe LAG.

After the setting of an LAG, if the non load sharing mode is adopted, only one member link hastraffic and the standby member link is in the standby state. When the active member link fails,the system activates the standby member link to shield the link failure.

Static Aggregation

The static aggregation of links requires the LACP protocol.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the LACP protocol that complies with IEEE 802.3ad. After theadministrator creates an LAG group or adds member ports into an LAG group, the equipmentautomatically enables the LACP protocol for the new member ports of the LAG. By exchangingLACP packets, two interconnected equipment negotiate which ports can be used to forward data,and thus determine whether an egress port is in the selected state.

The LACP protocol maintains the link state according to the port state. When aggregationconditions change, the link aggregation is automatically adjusted or dismantled. Among themember links of an LAG, the load sharing modes can function based on ports, MAC addresses,IP addresses, or MPLS labels.

6.2.5 ML-PPP ProtectionThe multilink point-to-point protocol (ML-PPP) bundles multiple PPP links to provide thefunctions of bandwidth increase, load sharing, and backup.

Figure 6-7 shows the packet ML-PPP protection.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 6-7 ML-PPP protection

Service detection point Service detection point

Switching module

Link

Link

...Service processing

module

Switching module

Service processing module

After the service signals are switchinged through the switching module to the service processingmodule, the service signals are transmitted through the multiple bundled links. In this way, theload sharing and protection are realized for the board ports on the network side. The bundledlinks are not distinguished by the working and protection attributes.

l Detection method:– At the physical layer, the loss of signal and the port link state are detected in

microseconds.– At the link layer, the link layer state is detected by the ML-PPP protocol in milliseconds.


6.2.6 IMA ProtectionInverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) demultiplexes a concentrated flow of ATM cells intomultiple lower-rate links, and at the remote end multiplexes these lower-rate links to recover theoriginal concentrated flow of ATM cells. In this way, multiple lower-rate links are flexibly andconveniently multiplexed.

IMA is applicable for transmitting ATM cells through E1/Fractional E1/VC-12 in thecSTM-1. IMA provides a path for ATM cells, but does not process the service types or ATMcells. Hence, IMA transparently transmit signals of the ATM layer and a higher layer. Figure6-8 shows the IMA transmission.

Figure 6-8 IMA transmission

Link 1

Link 2

Link 3

IMA group

ATM cell flow ATM cell flow

In IMA protection, when one link in the IMA group fails, the cell load is shared by other normallinks. In this way, the service is protected.

6.2.7 FRR ProtectionIn the fast reroute (FRR) protection, extra resources are reserved for protection. FRR providesfast local protection. FRR is usually deployed in a network that requires high reliability. When



6-11

a local failure occurs in the network, FRR is able to quickly switch the services to a bypasstunnel. In this case, the impact on data services is very small.

Basic Concepts of FRRThe basic concepts of FRR are described as follows.

l Detour mode: Refers to one-to-one backup. In the detour mode, LSPs are protectedseparately, that is, one protection LSP is specially created for each protected LSP. Thisprotection LSP is called a detour LSP.

l Bypass mode: Refers to facility backup. In the bypass mode, one protection LSP is used toprotect multiple LSPs. This protection LSP is called a bypass LSP.

l Point of local repair (PLR): The PLR is the ingress node of a detour LSP or bypass LSP.It must be on the working LSP and cannot be the egress node.

l Merge point (MP): The MP is the egress node of a detour LSP or bypass LSP. It must beon the working LSP and cannot be the ingress node.

l Link protection: In link protection, the PLR and the MP are directly connected by a linkand the working LSP passes through this link. When this link fails, the services can beswitched to a detour LSP or bypass LSP.

l Node protection: In node protection, the PLR and the MP are connected by a node and theworking tunnel passes through this node. When this node fails, the services can be switchedto a detour LSP or bypass LSP.

FRR protection complies with RFC 4090.

FRR Protection PrincipleFRR provides protection for a local area (a link or a node) that is between the PLR and the MP.The basic principle of FRR protection is to use a preconfigured tunnel to protect one or multipletunnels. The equipment supports the bypass mode.

A bypass tunnel refers to a tunnel that does not have the FRR attribute. When a tunnel is specifiedto protect other tunnels that pass a certain physical interface, this tunnel is called bypass tunnel.A manual bypass tunnel is triggered by manual configuration at the PLR. The configuration ofa manual bypass tunnel is similar to the configuration of a common tunnel. The only differenceis that the bypass tunnel cannot be configured with the FRR attribute. That is, recursive FRRprotection is not allowed for a tunnel.

Figure 6-9 shows the FRR protection.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 6-9 FRR Protection

A B

C

D E

F

MPPLR

Working tunnel

Bypass tunnel

In the working tunnel is marked in blue, and the bypass tunnel is marked in red. FRR providesprotection for the B-C link and node C that are connected to the PLR. When the B-C link ornode C fails, services on the working tunnel is switched to the bypass tunnel. After the switching,the path information of the original LSP is deleted.



6-13

7 OAM

About This Chapter

The OptiX PTN 910 provides powerful operation, administration and maintenance (OAM)functions.

7.1 OAM CapabilityThe boards and functions of the OptiX PTN 910 are designed with consideration of customerrequirements for operation and maintenance. Hence, the equipment provides powerfulmaintenance capabilities.

7.2 U2000 SystemThe U2000 system is used to manage the OptiX PTN 910.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 7 OAM


7-1

7.1 OAM CapabilityThe boards and functions of the OptiX PTN 910 are designed with consideration of customerrequirements for operation and maintenance. Hence, the equipment provides powerfulmaintenance capabilities.

7.1.1 Operation and Configuration ToolsUsers can operate and configure the equipment on the U2000.

7.1.2 Monitoring and MaintenanceThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various monitoring and maintenance functions.

7.1.3 Diagnosis and DebuggingThe OptiX PTN 910 provides the diagnosis and debugging functions for the hardware andsoftware faults of the system.

7.1.4 Expansion and UpgradeThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the expansion capability, and provides ideal upgrade schemes.

7.1.1 Operation and Configuration ToolsUsers can operate and configure the equipment on the U2000.

U2000: Users can use the OptiX iManager series transmission network management system(U2000) to perform network level configuration.

For details about the U2000, see 7.2 U2000 System.

7.1.2 Monitoring and MaintenanceThe OptiX PTN 910 supports various monitoring and maintenance functions.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the following monitoring and maintenance functions:l The running status and alarm indicators are available on each board, thus facilitating the

administrator to locate and handle faults in time.l The equipment provides functions such as alarm severity management and alarm filtering.

l The equipment supports in-service backup and loading of the database.

l The equipment supports restoration of the system configuration from the database.

l The equipment supports MPLS OAM.

l The equipment supports inband DCN management.

l The U2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the running status, alarms, and performanceevents of each NE in the network.

l The equipment supports remote maintenance. By remote access to the equipment throughthe U2000, users can maintain and monitor the equipment. In this way, the equipmentsecurity is ensured.

7.1.3 Diagnosis and DebuggingThe OptiX PTN 910 provides the diagnosis and debugging functions for the hardware andsoftware faults of the system.

7 OAMOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

The OptiX PTN 910 uses the following MPLS layer connectivity test schemes to provide thediagnosis and debugging functions.

l LSP Ping

l Traceroute

l MPLS OAM

7.1.4 Expansion and UpgradeThe OptiX PTN 910 supports the expansion capability, and provides ideal upgrade schemes.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports the expansion by inserting new boards or replacing old boards.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports in-service upgrade of software. The control plane upgrade doesnot affect the forwarding plane, and does not interrupt services.

The OptiX PTN 910 supports anti-mistake software loading and version rollback in the case ofan upgrade failure.

NOTE

Rollback means that, in the case of a software upgrade failure, the software and the service configurationcan be restored to their state before upgrade. The new version software overwrites the old version softwareonly after the upgrade is successful.

7.2 U2000 SystemThe U2000 system is used to manage the OptiX PTN 910.

In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the U2000 adopts the standard managementinformation model and object-oriented management technology. The U2000 exchangesinformation with the equipment software through the communication module, to monitor andmanage the network equipment.

The U2000 software uses Qx5 interfaces for the management of the OptiX PTN 910.

The U2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC to manage the equipment and network. TheU2000 enables the user not only to operate and maintain transmission equipment, but also tomanage the transmission network. The U2000 software has the following managementfunctions.

Alarm and Performance Management

The U2000 realizes alarm management functions such as real-time collection, prompting,filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, and fault diagnosis. Examplefunctions are as follows:

l Automatically report alarms and perform alarm consistency check.

l Check and delete alarms.

l Clear and filter current or history alarms of an NE, and filter abnormal events.

l Save alarm data.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 7 OAM


7-3

Configuration ManagementThe U2000 realizes configuration management functions such as service configuration,protection configuration, clock configuration, and maintenance for an NE. Example functionsare as follows:

l Configure different kinds of services.

l Configure and manage MPLS protection.

l Configure and manage the OAM.

Security ManagementThe U2000 provides various NE security management functions. Example functions are asfollows:

l NE user management.

l NE login management.– Query users that are logged in to the NE.

– Delete an NE user.

– Force an NE user to log out.

l NE login lockout.

l NE setting lockout.

l NE user groups management.

l NE security parameters.

l NE security log.

7 OAMOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

8 Security Management

About This Chapter

The U2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX PTN 910 NE. The NEsecurity management includes authentication management, authorization management, networksecurity management, system security management, NE security log management, and syslogmanagement. The NE security management takes effect on the basis of the reasonable planning.

8.1 Authentication ManagementConsidering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.

8.2 Authorization ManagementProper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operationsperformed by each user and the security of the NE system.

8.3 Network Security ManagementSafe data transmission between the U2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the U2000 toeffectively manage the NEs.

8.4 System Security ManagementConsidering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executedforcibly.

8.5 NE Security Log ManagementThe NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operationresults. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.

8.6 Syslog ManagementThe system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. Forunified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the logserver in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 8 Security Management


8-1

8.1 Authentication ManagementConsidering the security, only the legal user can log in to the NE after authentication.

l NE login management: You can successfully log in to the NE only by entering a valid username and a valid password.

l NE user switching: On a client, only one user is allowed to operate the NE each time. Forthis reason, if multiple users intend to operate the same NE simultaneously, they need tobe switched to ensure that the data is unique.

l Forcibly making other users exit from the NE: To avoid errors caused by simultaneousconfiguration by multiple users, or to prevent other users from illegally logging in to theNE, one user can forcibly make other users who are at the lower level or the same levelexit from the NE.

l Query the online NE users.

8.2 Authorization ManagementProper authority assignment to different NE users can ensure the successful operationsperformed by each user and the security of the NE system.

l NE user management:– According to the operation authorities, NE users are divided into five levels, which

involve monitoring level, operation level, maintenance level, system level, anddebugging level in an ascending order.

– According to the U2000, NE users are classified into Local Craft Terminal (LCT) NEusers, Element Management System (EMS) NE users, Command (CMD) NE users, andgeneral NE users.

– Create NE users, assign authorities, or specify a user flag.

– Modify the user name, password, operation authority, or user activation status flag.

– Delete NE users.

l NE user group management:– According to the operation authority, by default, NE user groups are divided into

administrator group, super administrator group, operator group, monitoring personnelgroup, and maintenance personnel group.

– Modify the group of a user.

8.3 Network Security ManagementSafe data transmission between the U2000 and NEs is the prerequisite for the U2000 toeffectively manage the NEs.

l The U2000 communicates with NEs through the security socket layer (SSL) protocol.Therefore, the data is complete and safe.

l Set the ACL rule to filter the received IP packets, control the data traffic in the network,and to avoid malicious attack. According to the system security level, the ACL rule isdivided into basic ACL and advanced ACL.

8 Security ManagementOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

– For an NE that requires lower security level, you can set the basic ACL rule only tocheck the source address of the IP packets.

– For an NE that requires higher security level, you can set the advanced ACL rule. Inthis case, the NE checks the source address, sink address, source port, sink port, andprotocol type of the received IP packets.

– If both the advanced and the basic ACL rules are available, the NE adopts the advancedACL rule to check the packets.

– Query the ACL rule.

– Modify the ACL rule.

– Delete the ACL rule.

l An NE can access the U2000 by using any of the following methods:– Access over the Ethernet network. By default, an NE allows the U2000 to access it over

the Ethernet network.– Access through the serial interface.

l Control the access to NEs by using the LCT: If the U2000-LCT needs to be used to manageNEs, log in to the U2000 and enable LCT access for the NE.

l When the U2000 communicates with an NE, confidential data (such as user name andpassword) is encrypted.

8.4 System Security ManagementConsidering the security, the system provides some security policies, which must be executedforcibly.

l Query and set the Warning Screen information of the NE.

l Query and set the Warning Screen switch of the NE to decide whether to report the alarminformation after a user logs in to the NE.

l set the expiry time of the password.

l Query the number of illegal login attempts.

l Query the number of overdue password attempts.

l Query the password uniqueness.

8.5 NE Security Log ManagementThe NE security logs record the operations performed by all the NE users and the operationresults. By querying these logs, the administrator can trace and review the operations.

l Query the security logs of the NE.

l Set forwarding NE logs to the Syslog Server.

8.6 Syslog ManagementThe system log service (Syslog service) is used for the security management on an NE. Forunified control by maintenance engineers, all types of information are transmitted to the logserver in the format complying with the system log (Syslog) protocol.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 8 Security Management


8-3

The OptiX PTN 910 supports:

l Enabling and disabling of Syslog protocol

l Setting of Syslog protocol transfer modes: UDP (by default) and TCP

l Adding and deletion of Syslog servers

l Coexisting of multiple Syslog servers and the sending of logs to multiple servers at thesame time

l Reporting of alarms upon the communication disconnection between the Syslog server andthe NE

Figure 8-1 shows how the Syslog protocol is transmitted in a network. To ensure the securityof system logs, suggest that at least two system log servers are available in a network. Normally,IP protocol is used for the communication between the NE and the system log servers.

Figure 8-1 Schematic diagram of Syslog protocol transmitting

DCN

NE A (client) NE C

(client)

NE B

NE D

NMS

Syslog server A

Syslog server BReal time

security log

TCP/IP

NOTE

Normally, a system log server is a workstation or server that is dedicated to storing the system logs of allNEs in a network.

A forwarding gateway NE receives the system logs of other NEs and forwards the logs to the system logserver. In Figure 8-1, NE A and NE C are forwarding gateway NEs.

When IP protocol is adopted on each NE for communication, every NE can directly communicatewith the two system log servers through the IP protocol. Hence, configure the IP addresses andport numbers of the syslog servers on the NE, and the system is able to transmit the NE logs tothe two Syslog servers through the auto addressing function of IP protocol. No forwardinggateway NE is required.

8 Security ManagementOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9 Boards

About This Chapter

Boards of the OptiX PTN 910 include system control, cross-connect and protocol processingboard, interface boards, packet microwave IF board, power supply board, and fan board.

9.1 CXPA/CXPBThis section describes the CXPA/CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel,valid slots, and technical specifications.

9.2 CXPG/CXPHThis section describes the CXPG/CXPH, which integrates the control, cross-connect, andprotocol processing units, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, frontpanel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

9.3 EF8TThis section describes the EF8T, which is an interface board with eight FE electrical interfaces,with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, andtechnical specifications.

9.4 EF8FThis section describes the EF8F, which is an interface board with eight FE optical interfaces,with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, andtechnical specifications.

9.5 EG2This section describes the EG2, which is an interface board with two GE optical interfaces, withregard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.6 ML1/ML1AThis section describes the ML1/ML1A, which is a 16 x E1 electrical interface board, with regardto the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.7 CD1This section describes the CD1, which is a 1 x channelized STM-1 service processing board, interms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 9 Boards


9-1

9.8 IFE2This section describes the IFE2, which is a intermediate frequency (IF) board, with regard to theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.9 ADS2A/ADS2BThis section describes the ADS2A/ADS2B, a 2-channel ADSL service interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.10 SHD4This section describes the SHD4, a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, in terms of theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.11 SHD4IThis section describes the SHD4I, a 4-channel SHDSL service interface board that supports theIMA mode, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, validslots, and technical specifications.

9.12 PIUThis section describes the PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features,working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

9.13 FANThis section describes the FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, workingprinciple, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

9 BoardsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.1 CXPA/CXPBThis section describes the CXPA/CXPB, which is the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board, with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel,valid slots, and technical specifications.

NOTE

The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPA is 75 ohms and the matched impedanceof the E1 interface on the CXPB is 120 ohms. The CXPA and CXPB have the same functions and features,except for the impedance of the E1 service interfaces. In this document, the CXPA represents the CXPAand CXPB.

9.1.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPA is TNC1.

9.1.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPA accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals and 16 x E1 signals, grooms services,performs the system control, processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.

9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPA consists of the control module, auxiliary interface module, service grooming andprocessing module, clock module, and power supply module.

9.1.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPA, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

9.1.5 Valid SlotsTwo slots house one CXPA. The CXPA can be housed in slot 1 and slot 2.

9.1.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPA.

9.1.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPA include the optical interface specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

9.1.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPA is TNC1.

9.1.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPA accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals and 16 x E1 signals, grooms services,performs the system control, processes the system clock, and provides auxiliary interfaces.

Table 9-1 lists the functions and features of the CXPA.

Table 9-1 Functions and Features of the CXPA

Function and Feature Description

Basic function Cross-connect capacity 6.5 Gbit/s

Line Rate I/O Capabilityusing the CXPA

4.43 Gbit/s



9-3


Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals and 16 x E1signals. In the case of the E1 services, the IMA, CES, andML-PPP protocols are supported.

Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at all the FE ports, the first E1 port, and the sixteenthE1 port. In addition, this function can be disabled or enabledmanually.

Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level.

Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port tocommunicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage andquery the equipment.Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting theexternal clock/time to obtain the external clock/timeinformation.Provides one alarm input/output interface for three alarminputs and one alarm output.Provides one extended network port or 64 kbit/s synchronousdata port. The extended network port is used to realize thecascading of Huawei equipment. The 64 kbit/s synchronousdata port, which is compliant with ITU-T G.703, is used totransparently transmit other NM data.Provides one orderwire interface.

Interface function Type of the loopback at theFE port

PHY-layer inloopMAC-layer outloop

Automatic loopback releaseat the port

Supported

LAG Intra-board LAG Supported

Inter-board LAG Supported

ATM/IMA Number of supported IMAgroups/supported ATM E1 services

8

Maximum number of E1links/serial ports in each IMAgroup

16

Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts theIMA group protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes theIMA group members.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


Supported traffic type CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR

Number of supported ATMconnections(VPC and VCC included)

256 remote connections128 local connections

Number of supported ATMservices

64

Encapsulates the ATM VPC/VCC services to the PWE3 inthe N-to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.

Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenationand non-concatenation modes. The number of PWconnections that support the cell concatenation is 64, and themaximum number of concatenated cells is 31.

ATM OAM on the UNI side Supports the CC test.

Supports the LB test.

CES Number of supported CESservices

32

Supported emulation mode CESoPSNSAToP

Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES servicesin the CESoPSN mode to save the transmission bandwidth.

Supported clock mode Retiming mode

The jitter buffer time of the CES service can be set. The jitterbuffer time ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step valueis 0.125 ms.

The encapsulation buffer time of the CES service can be set.The encapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.125 ms to 5 ms,and the step value is 0.125 ms.

ML-PPP Number of supported ML-PPP groups

7

Maximum number of linkssupported by each ML-PPPgroup

16



9-5


Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNIinterface to access IP packets of the L3VPN services.

Clock Synchronous Ethernet Supported

SSM protocol Supported by the FE ports

IEEE 1588V2 protocol Supported

1588 ACR clock Supported

9.1.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPA consists of the control module, auxiliary interface module, service grooming andprocessing module, clock module, and power supply module.

Figure 9-1 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA.

Figure 9-1 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPA

Service grooming and

processing module

Clock module

Power supply module

Control module

4 x FE electrical signals

16 x E1 signals

Auxiliary interface module

Orderwire interface

Alarm input/output interface

Extended network interface/transparent data interface

NM network interface/serial interface

Transparent data signals

Orderwire signals

Alarm input/output signals

External time/clock signals

Time/clock signals

Extended network interface signals

NM network interface/serial interface signals

Clock signals

3.3 V

12 VFAN

Interface boards

Working clock

signals

Backplane

Working powerEach module on the board

Each module on the board

2-channel external time/clock input/output interface

Interface boards

Interface boardsService bus

Interface boards

Management bus

Management bus

-48 V/-60 VPIU

-48 V/-60 VPIU


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Control Module

This module performs the following functions:

l Configures and monitors the CXPA and the entire system.

l Enables the communication through the NM serial interface and NM Ethernet interface.

l Enables the communication based on the extended Ethernet interface.

Service Grooming and Processing Module


l Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals.

l Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals.

l Processes the services accessed by the interface boards.

l Supports the CES, ML-PPP, and IMA protocols for E1 services.

l Grooms services with 6.5 Gbit/s switching capacity in the full-duplex mode.

l Supports 4.43 Gbit/s line rate I/O capability of the system.

Auxiliary Interface Module


l Provides two interfaces for input and output of the external clock/time.

l Provides one NM serial interface or NM Ethernet interface for communication with theNMS, management and queries of the equipment.

l Provides one alarm input/output interface to input three channels of alarms and output onechannel of alarms.

l Provides one orderwire interface.

l Provides one extended network port or 64 kbit/s synchronous data port. The extendednetwork port is used to realize the cascading of Huawei equipment. The 64 kbit/ssynchronous data port, which is compliant with ITU-T G.703, is used to transparentlytransmit other NM data.

Clock Module


l Provides the system clock signals and processes the clock signals from the service boardsand the external clock/time interfaces.

l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPA.

l Supports the synchronous Ethernet and the SSM protocol.

l Supports the IEEE 1588V2 protocol.

l Supports the 1588 ACR clock.



9-7

Power Supply ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Accesses two - 48 V DC or - 60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPA.

l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.

l Supplies 3.3 V power for other boards.

9.1.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPA, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-2 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPA.

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the CXPA

IndicatorThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPA:

l STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board working status

l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program

l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status

l SRV indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the service status

l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms

l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms

l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms

l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status

l ACT indicator, yellow, which indicates the data transceiving status of the port

NOTE

The LINK and ACT indicators, which are present above ETH/OAM, EXT/F1, and FE service interface,indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.

For details on meanings of indicators, see C Indicators.

ButtonThe following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPA:

l RST button, which is used for warm reset of the board. When you press the RST buttonand then release it, the board is reset (warm).


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

l CF RCV button, which is used to restore the configuration data from the CF card. Whenyou press the CF RCV button for 5 seconds, the equipment automatically restores theconfiguration data from the CF card.

l LAMP, which is used to test the indicators on the board. When you press the LAMP button,all the board indicators on the NE, except the Ethernet service interface indicators, shouldbe on.

InterfaceTable 9-2 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA.

Table 9-2 Types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPA

Interface onthe FrontPanel

Interface Type

Usage Pin

ETH/OAM RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX NM Ethernetinterface or NM serial interface

For details, seeTable 9-3.

CLK1/TOD1 RJ-45 External clock/time input/output interface For details, seeTable 9-4.

CLK2/TOD2 RJ-45 External clock/time input/output interface For details, seeTable 9-4.

EXT/F1 RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX extended Ethernetinterface or 64 kbit/s synchronous datainterface


PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire interface For details, seeTable 9-6.

ALMI/ALMO RJ-45 3 x alarm inputs and 1 x alarm outputinterface


FE1 - FE4 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FE electricalsignals


E1 (1 - 16) Anea 96 E1 service input/output interface -

Table 9-3 lists the pins of the ETH/OAM interface.



9-9

Table 9-3 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface

Front View Pin Usage

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive of the NM interface

2 Transmit negative of the NM interface

3 Receive positive of the NM interface

4 Grounding end of the NM serial interface

5 Receive end of the NM serial interface

6 Receive negative of the NM interface

7 Undefined

8 Transmit end of the NM serial interface

Table 9-4 lists the pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces.

Table 9-4 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interface


ExternalClock

ExternalTime Input(1PPS + TimeInformation)

ExternalTimeOutput(1PPS +TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input(DCLS)

ExternalTime Output(DCLS)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Negativereceive endof externalclock

Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified

2 Positivereceive endof externalclock


3 Unspecified Negative inputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)

Negativeoutput for the1pps signal(RS422 level)

Negativeinput for theDCLS timesignal(RS422level)

Negativeoutput for theDCLS timesignal(RS422 level)


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


ExternalClock

ExternalTime Input(1PPS + TimeInformation)

ExternalTimeOutput(1PPS +TimeInformation)

ExternalTime Input(DCLS)

ExternalTime Output(DCLS)

4 Negativetransmit endof externalclock

Grounding end Groundingend

Groundingend

Grounding end

5 Positivetransmit endof externalclock

Grounding end Groundingend

Groundingend

Grounding end

6 Unspecified Positive inputfor the 1ppssignal(RS422 level)

Positiveoutput for the1pps signal(RS422 level)

Positiveinput for theDCLS timesignal(RS422level)

Positive outputfor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)

7 Unspecified Negative inputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)

Negativeoutput fortimeinformation(RS422 level)

Unspecified Unspecified

8 Unspecified Positive inputfor timeinformation(RS422 level)

Positiveoutput fortimeinformation(RS422 level)


NOTE

The CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of thepreceding five working modes.

Table 9-5 lists the pins of the EXT/F1 interface.



9-11

Table 9-5 Pins of the EXT/F1 interface


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive of the extended Ethernetinterface

2 Transmit negative of the extended Ethernetinterface

3 Receive positive of the extended Ethernetinterface

4 Transmit positive of the 64 kbit/ssynchronous data interface

5 Transmit negative of the 64 kbit/ssynchronous data interface

6 Receive negative of the extended Ethernetinterface

7 Receive positive of the 64 kbit/s synchronousdata interface

8 Receive negative of the 64 kbit/s synchronousdata interface

Table 9-6 lists the pins of the PHONE interface.

Table 9-6 Pins of the PHONE interface

Front View Pin Purpose

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 - 3 Undefined

4 RING

5 TIP

6 - 8 Undefined

Table 9-7 lists the pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 9-7 Pins of the ALMI/ALMO interface


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Alarm input 1

2 Grounding end for alarm input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3



7 Alarm output positive

8 Alarm output negative

Table 9-8 lists the pins of the FE1 - FE4 interfaces.

Table 9-8 Pins of the FE1-FE4 interfaces


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive

2 Transmit negative

3 Receive positive

4 Undefined

5 Undefined

6 Receive negative

7 Undefined

8 Undefined

9.1.5 Valid SlotsTwo slots house one CXPA. The CXPA can be housed in slot 1 and slot 2.

9.1.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the CXPA.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the CXPA:

l Ethernet interface

l E1 interface



9-13

l Environment monitor interface

l External clock/time interface

The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface, set thephysical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters and flow control schemes.

To configure the E1 interface, set the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes, and advancedattributes of the E1 interface. In details, set the physical parameters, network-layer parameters,signal frame format, clock mode, and loopback mode for the E1 interface.

To configure the environment monitor interface, set the relay control mode.

9.1.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPA include the optical interface specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

For the technical specifications of the CXPA, see 10.3.1 CXPA/CXPB.

9.2 CXPG/CXPHThis section describes the CXPG/CXPH, which integrates the control, cross-connect, andprotocol processing units, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, frontpanel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

NOTE

The matched impedance of the E1 service interface on the CXPG is 75 ohms and that on the CXPH is 120ohms. The CXPG and CXPH have the same functions and features, except for the impedance of theinterfaces. In this document, the CXPG represents them both.

9.2.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPG is TNC1.

9.2.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPG accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 2 x GE optical signals, and 16 x E1signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the system clock, and providesauxiliary interfaces.

9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPG consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication module,service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.

9.2.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPG, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

9.2.5 Valid SlotsTwo slots house one CXPG. The CXPG can be housed in slots 1 and 2.

9.2.6 Board Configuration ReferenceThe CXPG can be configured through the U2000.

9.2.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPG cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.2.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CXPG is TNC1.

9.2.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CXPG accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 2 x GE optical signals, and 16 x E1signals, grooms services, performs the system control, processes the system clock, and providesauxiliary interfaces.

Table 9-9 lists the functions and features of the CXPG.

Table 9-9 Functions and features of the CXPG


Basic function Cross-connect capacity 6.5 Gbit/s

Line Rate I/O Capabilityusing the CXPG

6.43 Gbit/s

Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals, 2 x GEoptical signals, and 16 x E1 signals.

Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at all the FE/GE ports, the first E1 port, and thesixteenth E1 port. In addition, this function can be disabledor enabled manually.

Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level.

Auxiliary interface function Provides one NM serial port or NM network port tocommunicate with the NMS so that the NMS can manage andquery the equipment.Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting theexternal clock/time to obtain the external clock/timeinformation.Provides one orderwire interface.

Interface function Type of the loopback at theGE port

PHY-layer inloop andoutloopMAC-layer outloop

Type of the loopback at theFE port



Supported



ATM/IMA Number of supported ATME1 services

8



9-15


Number of supported IMAgroups

8


16



Number of supported ATMconnections



64

Encapsulates ATM VPC/VCC service to the PWE3 in the N-to-1 (N≤32) or 1-to-1 format.





32






Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)




7


16



SSM protocol Supported



9.2.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CXPG consists of the auxiliary interface module, control and communication module,service grooming and processing module, clock module, and power supply module.

Figure 9-3 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the CXPG.



9-17

Figure 9-3 Block diagram for the working principle of the CXPG

Service grooming and

processing module

Clock module

Power supply module

Control and communication

module

4 x FE electrical signals

16 x E1 signals

Auxiliary interface module

NMS network port or NMS serial port

Two external time/clock signals

Orderwire signal

Clock signal

3.3 V

12 VFAN

Interface boards

Clock signal

Backplane

Working power supplyEach module

on the board


Two external time/clock input/output interfaces

Interface boards

Interface boardsService bus

Interface boards

Management bus

Management bus

-48 V/-60 VPIU

-48 V/-60 V PIU

2 x GE signals

NMS signal

Orderwire interface

Auxiliary Interface ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Provides two interfaces for inputting and outputting the external clock/time.

l Provides one NM serial port or NM network port for communicating with the NMS,managing the equipment, and querying the equipment.

l Provides one orderwire interface.

Control and Communication ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Configures and monitors the CXPG and the entire system.

l Enables the communication through the NM serial port or NM network port.

l Supports the communication through the orderwire.

Service Grooming and Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions:


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

l Accesses and processes 2 x GE optical signals.

l Accesses and processes 4 x FE electrical signals.

l Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals.

l Processes the service signals accessed by the interface boards.

l Supports the CES, ML-PPP, and IMA protocols for E1 services.

l Grooms services with 6.5 Gbit/s switching capacity in the full-duplex mode.

l Supports 6.43 Gbit/s line rate I/O capability of the system.

Clock ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Provides the system clock signals and processes the clock signals from the service boardsand the external clock/time interfaces.

l Provides the working clock for each module on the CXPG.





l Accesses two -48 V or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies working power for each module on the CXPG.

l Supplies 12 V power for the FAN board.

l Supplies 3.3 V power for the interface board.

9.2.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CXPG, there are indicators, buttons, and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-4 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CXPG.

Figure 9-4 Appearance of the front panel of the CXPG

IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the CXPG:



9-19

l STAT indicator, red, orange, or green, which indicates the board working status

l PROG indicator, red or green, which indicates the running status of the program

l SYNC indicator, red or green, which indicates the clock synchronization status


l L/A1 and L/A2 indicators, orange or green, which indicate the connection status of the port

l CRIT indicator, red, which indicates critical alarms

l MAJ indicator, orange, which indicates major alarms

l MIN indicator, yellow, which indicates minor alarms

l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the port connection status


NOTE

Above the ETH/OAM and four FE service interfaces, five pairs of LINK and ACT indicators are present,which indicate the connection status of the Ethernet interface.

For details on indications of indicators, see C Indicators.

ButtonsThe following buttons are present on the front panel of the CXPG:

l RST button, which is used for warm reset of the board. When you press the RST buttonand then release it, the board is reset (warm).

l CF RCV button, which is used to restore the configuration data from the CF card. Whenyou hold down the CF RCV button for five seconds, the equipment automatically restoresthe configuration data from the CF card.

l LAMP button, which is used to test the indicators. When you press the LAMP button, allthe board indicators on the NE, except the Ethernet service interface indicators, should beon.

InterfacesTable 9-10 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the CXPG.

Table 9-10 Interfaces on the CXPG

Interface Name InterfaceType

Usage Pin

ETH/OAM RJ-45 10Base-T/100Base-TX NM networkport or NM serial port

For details, see Table9-11.

CLK1/TOD1 RJ-45 External time/clock input/outputinterface


CLK2/TOD2 RJ-45 External time/clock input/outputinterface


PHONE RJ-45 Orderwire interface For details, see Table9-13.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Interface Name InterfaceType

Usage Pin

FE1 to FE4 RJ-45 Input/output interface for FEelectrical signals


OUT1 IN1,OUT2 IN2

LC/RJ-45

Input/output interface for GE opticalsignals


E1 (1 to 16) Anea 96 E1 service input/output interface -

Table 9-11 lists the pins of the ETH/OAM interface.

Table 9-11 Pins of the ETH/OAM interface


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive of the NM network port

2 Transmit negative of the NM network port

3 Receive positive of the NM network port

4 Grounding end of the NM serial port

5 Receive end of the NM serial port

6 Receive negative of the NM network port

7 Unspecified

8 Transmit end of the NM serial port

Table 9-12 lists the pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces.



9-21

Table 9-12 Pins of the CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces

Front View Pin

Working Mode

External Clock

ExternalTime Input(1PPS +TimeInformation)

External TimeOutput(1PPS + TimeInformation)

External TimeInput(DCLS)

External TimeOutput(DCLS)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Receivenegativeof theCLK


2 Receivepositiveof theCLK


3 Unspecified

Inputnegative forthe 1PPSsignal(RS422 level)

Output negativefor the 1PPSsignal(RS422 level)

Input negativefor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)

Output negativefor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)

4 Transmitnegativeof theCLK

Groundingend

Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

5 Transmitpositiveof theCLK

Groundingend

Grounding end Grounding end Grounding end

6 Unspecified

Input positivefor the 1PPSsignal(RS422 level)

Output positivefor the 1PPSsignal(RS422 level)

Input positivefor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)

Output positivefor the DCLStime signal(RS422 level)

7 Unspecified

Inputnegative forthe timeinformation(RS422 level)

Output negativefor the timeinformation(RS422 level)


8 Unspecified

Input positivefor the timeinformation(RS422 level)

Output positivefor the timeinformation(RS422 level)



Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

NOTE

The CLK1/TOD1 and CLK2/TOD2 interfaces can be configured so that they can work in one of thepreceding five working modes.

Table 9-13 lists the pins of the PHONE interface.

Table 9-13 Pins of the PHONE interface


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 to 3 Unspecified

4 RING

5 TIP

6 to 8 Unspecified

Table 9-14 lists the pins of the FE1 interface to FE4 interface.

Table 9-14 Pins of the FE1 interface to FE4 interface


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive

2 Transmit negative

3 Receive positive

4 Unspecified

5 Unspecified

6 Receive negative

7 Unspecified

8 Unspecified

Table 9-15 lists the pins of the OUT1 IN1 and OUT2 IN2 interfaces.

Table 9-15 Pins of the GE optical interfaces

Interface on theFront Panel

Interface Type Usage

IN1 to IN2 LC Input interface for the GE optical signal.



9-23



OUT1 to OUT2 LC Output interface for the GE optical signal.

9.2.5 Valid SlotsTwo slots house one CXPG. The CXPG can be housed in slots 1 and 2.

9.2.6 Board Configuration ReferenceThe CXPG can be configured through the U2000.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the CXPG:

l Ethernet interface

l E1 interface

l Environment monitoring interface

l External clock/time interface

The attributes of the Ethernet interface include the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer3 attributes, advanced attributes, and traffic control. In details, the physical parameters, link-layer parameters, network-layer parameters, and traffic control mode for the Ethernet interfacemust be set.

The attributes of the E1 interface include the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes, and advancedattributes. In details, the physical parameters, network-layer parameters, signal frame format,clock mode, and loopback mode for the E1 interface must be set.

9.2.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CXPG cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For the technical specifications of the CXPG, see 10.3.2 CXPG/CXPH.

9.3 EF8TThis section describes the EF8T, which is an interface board with eight FE electrical interfaces,with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, andtechnical specifications.

9.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EF8T is TND1.

9.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EF8T mainly accesses 8 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with theCXPA/CXPG.

9.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EF8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.3.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EF8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.3.5 Valid SlotsThe EF8T can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

9.3.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8T.

9.3.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EF8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

9.3.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EF8T is TND1.

9.3.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EF8T mainly accesses 8 x FE electrical signals, and processes the services with theCXPA/CXPG.

Table 9-16 lists the functions and features of the EF8T.

Table 9-16 Functions and features of the EF8T


Basic function Supports eight FE electrical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE electricalsignals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function can bedisabled or enabled manually.

Supports the hot swappable function.

Detects the temperature and voltage of the board.

Interface function Type of the loopback at the port PHY-layer inloopMAC-layer outloop

Automatic loopback release at theport

Supported









9-25

9.3.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EF8T mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

Figure 9-5 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EF8T.

Figure 9-5 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8T

Access and convergence

module

8 x FE electrical signals Service bus

Control driver

module

Management bus

Service bus

Clock module

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V

1.2 V

3.3 V

Clock signals

Backplane

Clock signals

PIUEach module on the board

Each module on the board-48 V/-60 V

PIU

Clock signals

CXP

CXP

CXP

NOTE

In the block diagram, the CXP on the backplane indicates the system control, cross-connect and protocolprocessing board. For OptiX PTN 910, the CXP indicates the CXPA/CXPB board or the CXPG/CXPHboard.

Access and Convergence ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Accesses 8 x FE electrical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.

l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.

l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.

Control Driver ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Detects the system status through the management bus.– Detects any fault of the CXPA/CXPG.

– Detects whether board is loosened from the slot.

– Detects the voltage and temperature.

l Realizes the hot swappable function of the board.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


l Provides the working clock for each module on the board.





l Accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8T.

9.3.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EF8T, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-6 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EF8T.

Figure 9-6 Font panel of the EF8T

IndicatorThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the EF8T:


l SRV indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates service status

l LINK indicator, green, which indicates the connection status of the port


NOTE

There are eight LINK indicators and eight ACT indicators. One LINK indicator and one ACT indicatorare present above each FE service interface.


InterfaceTable 9-17 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the EF8T.



9-27

Table 9-17 Types and usage of interfaces on the EF8T


Interface Type Usage Pin

FE1 - FE8 RJ-45 Input/output interfaces forFE electrical signals


Table 9-18 Pins of the RJ-45 connector of the EF8T


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Transmit positive

2 Transmit negative

3 Receive positive

4 Undefined

5 Undefined

6 Receive negative

7 Undefined

8 Undefined

9.3.5 Valid SlotsThe EF8T can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

9.3.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8T.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EF8T:

Ethernet interface

The attributes of an Ethernet interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3attributes, advanced attributes and flow control. To configure an Ethernet interface, configurethe physical parameters, link layer parameters, network layer parameters and flow controlschemes.

9.3.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EF8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For the technical specifications of the EF8T, see 10.3.3 EF8T.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.4 EF8FThis section describes the EF8F, which is an interface board with eight FE optical interfaces,with regard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, andtechnical specifications.

9.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EF8F is TND1.

9.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EF8F mainly accesses 8 x FE optical signals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

9.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EF8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

9.4.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EF8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.4.5 Valid SlotsThe EF8F can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

9.4.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8F.

9.4.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EF8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

9.4.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EF8F is TND1.

9.4.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EF8F mainly accesses 8 x FE optical signals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

Table 9-19 lists the functions and features of the EF8F.

Table 9-19 Functions and features of the EF8F


Basic function Supports eight FE optical interfaces. Accesses 8 x FE opticalsignals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the first four ports. In addition, this function canbe disabled or enabled manually.





9-29


Interface function Type of the loopback at theport



Supported







9.4.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EF8F mainly consists of the access and convergence module, control driver module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

Figure 9-7 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EF8F.

Figure 9-7 Block diagram for the functions of the EF8F

Access and convergence

module

8 x FE optical signals Service bus

Control driver

module

Management bus

Service bus

Clock module

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V

1.2 V

3.3 V

Clock signals

Backplane

Clock signals


Each module on the board -48 V/-60 VPIU

Clock signals

CXP

CXP

CXP

NOTE



Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Access and Convergence ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Accesses 8 x FE optical signals.

l Buffers FE signals to avoid packet loss.

l Provides flow control frames to control the number of packets.

l Processes the IEEE 1588V2 packets.

Control Driver ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Detects the system status through the management control bus.– Checks whether any fault occurs on the CXPA/CXPG.





l Provides the working clock for each module on the EF8F.





l Accesses two - 48 V DC or - 60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V and 1.2 V power for the EF8F.

9.4.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EF8F, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-8 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EF8F.

Figure 9-8 Font panel of the EF8F



9-31

Indicators

The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EF8F:



l LINK1 to LINK8 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port


Interfaces

Table 9-20 lists the types and usage of the interfaces on the EF8F.

Table 9-20 Interfaces of the EF8F

Interface onthe FrontPanel


IN1 - IN8 LC Input interface for FE optical signals

OUT1 - OUT8 LC Output interface for FE optical signals

9.4.5 Valid SlotsThe EF8F can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4 in the slot area.

9.4.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EF8F.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EF8F:

Ethernet interface


9.4.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EF8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For the technical specifications of the EF8F, see 10.3.4 EF8F.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.5 EG2This section describes the EG2, which is an interface board with two GE optical interfaces, withregard to the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EG2 is TND1.

9.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EG2 mainly accesses 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

9.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EG2 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

9.5.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EG2, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.5.5 Valid SlotsThe EG2 can be housed in any of slots 3 to 4 in the slot area.

9.5.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EG2.

9.5.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EG2 include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

9.5.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the EG2 is TND1.

9.5.2 Functions and FeaturesThe EG2 mainly accesses 2 x GE signals, and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

Table 9-21 lists the functions and features of the EG2.

Table 9-21 Functions and Features of the EG2


Basic function Supports two GE optical interfaces. Accesses 2 x GE signals,and processes the services with the CXPA/CXPG.

Supports the inband DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the two ports. In addition, this function can bedisabled or enabled manually.





9-33


Interface function Type of the loopback at theport

PHY-layer inloop andoutloopMAC-layer outloop


Supported







9.5.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe EG2 mainly consists of the interface conversion module, control driving module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

Figure 9-9 shows the block diagram for the functions of the EG2.

Figure 9-9 Block diagram for the functions of the EG2

Interface conversion

module

2 x GE signals Service bus Control driver

module

Management bus

Service bus

Clock module

Power supply module

-48 V/-60 V

1.2 V

3.3 V

Clock signals

Backplane

Clock signals



CXP

-48 V/-60 VPIU

Clock signals

CXP

CXP

NOTE



Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Interface Conversion ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Accesses 2 x GE services in two directions.

l Supports ESFP optical interfaces and GE colored optical interfaces. Select a proper opticalinterface for single-mode or multi-mode transmission over a specified distance.

Control Driving ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l Detects the system status through the management bus.– Detects any fault of the CXPA/CXPG.




Clock moduleThis module performs the following functions:

l Provides the working clock for each module on the EG2.





l Accesses two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies 3.3 V or 1.2 V power for each module on the EG2.

9.5.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the EG2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-10 shows the appearance of the front panel of the EG2.

Figure 9-10 Font panel of the EG2



9-35

Indicators

The following indicators are present on the front panel of the EG2.

l STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board status


l LINK1 to LINK2 indicators, green, which indicate the connection status of the port

l ACT1 to ACT2 indicators, yellow, which indicate the data transceiving status of the port


Interfaces

Table 9-22 list the types and usage of the interfaces on the EG2.

Table 9-22 Types and usage of optical interfaces on the EG2



IN1 - IN2 LC Input interface for the GE optical signals

OUT1 - OUT2 LC Output interface for the GE optical signals

9.5.5 Valid SlotsThe EG2 can be housed in any of slots 3 to 4 in the slot area.

9.5.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the EG2.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the EG2:

Ethernet interface


9.5.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the EG2 include the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For the technical specifications of the EG2, see 10.3.5 EG2.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.6 ML1/ML1AThis section describes the ML1/ML1A, which is a 16 x E1 electrical interface board, with regardto the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

NOTE

The ML1 and ML1A have the same functions and features except for the matched impedance (ML1: 75ohms E1; ML1A: 120 ohms E1). In this document, the ML1 represents the ML1 and ML1A, unlessotherwise specified.

9.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ML1 is TND1.

9.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ML1 is a 75-ohm E1 board and the ML1A is a 120-ohm E1 board. The ML1 can access amaximum of 16 x E1 signals, supports flexible configuration of different services on each port,and is hot swappable.

9.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ML1 mainly consists of the control module, line-side processing module, system-sideprocessing module, backplane interface module, clock module, and power supply module.

9.6.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the ML1, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.6.5 Valid SlotsThe ML1 can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

9.6.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the ML1.

9.6.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the ML1 include the board dimensions, and weight.

9.6.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ML1 is TND1.

9.6.2 Functions and FeaturesThe ML1 is a 75-ohm E1 board and the ML1A is a 120-ohm E1 board. The ML1 can access amaximum of 16 x E1 signals, supports flexible configuration of different services on each port,and is hot swappable.

Table 9-23 lists functions and features of the ML1.

Table 9-23 Functions and features of the ML1

Function and Feature Remarks

Basic functions Accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals and supports the IMA,CES, and ML-PPP protocols.



9-37


Supports the in-band DCN. By default, the DCN function isenabled at the first and the sixteenth E1 ports. In addition, thisfunction can be disabled or enabled manually.

Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kbit/s level.

ATM/IMA Number of supported IMAgroups/supported ATM E1 services

8


16


Supported traffic types CBRUBRUBR+rt-VBRnrt-VBR




64






32




Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


Supported clock modes Retiming mode




7


16


9.6.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ML1 mainly consists of the control module, line-side processing module, system-sideprocessing module, backplane interface module, clock module, and power supply module.

Figure 9-11shows the block diagram for the working principle of the ML1.

Figure 9-11 Block diagram for the working principle of the ML1

Backplane

Backplane interface module

System-side processing module

Service bus

Serial management bus

-48 V/-60 V

-48 V/-60 V

1.2 V

1.26 V2.5 VTo each module

16 x E1 signals Line-side processing

module

3.3 V

Clock signals

Power supply module

Clock module

Control module

Clock signals

Management bus

3.3 V

CXP

CXP

CXPTo each module

Service bus

Service bus

Management bus



9-39

NOTE


In Transmit Direction

The ML1 first distributes the signals in Ethernet packets from the backplane to different protocolprocessing chips according to the service types. The system-side processing module decapsulatesthe concatenated services and buffers the services in queues. Then, this module schedules theegress queues according to the service types, processes and converts the services, and finallysends the services to the line-side processing module. The line-side processing module performscoding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving for the services, and finally sends the servicesto E1 interfaces.

In Receive Direction

The line processing module performs impedance match, signal equalization, signal levelconversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding for the accessed E1 signals. Then, thesignals are sent into the system-side processing module, which frames the signals, encapsulatesthe IMA, CES, and ML-PPP services in PWE3, and schedules PWs. Finally, this module sendsthe signals in Ethernet packets to the backplane interface module.

Line-Side Processing Module

In the receive channel, this module performs impedance match, signal equalization, electricallevel conversion, clock data recovery, dejitter, and decoding to signals. In the transmit channel,this module performs encoding, dejitter, pulse shaping, and line driving to signals.

System-Side Processing Module

This module frames 16 x E1 signals, runs the CES, IMA, and ML-PPP protocols, and performsPWE3 encapsulation.

Backplane Interface Module

The service bus receives or transmits service signals.

Control Module

This module controls the reading and writing on the chip, resets the chip, and detects faults inthe chip.When used with the CXPA/CXPG, this module controls the board.

Clock Module

This module provides various clock signals for the board to operate normally, detects clocks,and selects the line recovery clock.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Power Supply ModuleThis module converts the -48 V DC/-60 V DC voltage to DC voltages required by each moduleon the board. In addition, this module supplies 3.3 V power to the ML1 through the backplane.

9.6.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the ML1, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-12 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ML1.

Figure 9-12 Front panel of the ML1

Figure 9-13 shows the appearance of the front panel of the ML1A.

Figure 9-13 Front panel of the ML1A

IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the ML1:


l SRV indicator, red, orange, or green, which indicates the service status

InterfacesThere is one Anea 96 interface on the front panel of the ML1. Table 9-24 lists the type and usageof the interface.

Table 9-24 Type and usage of the interface on the front panel of the ML1

Interface on the FrontPanel


1 - 16 Anea 96 Receives and transmits E1signals from channels 1 - 16.



9-41

Table 9-25 lists the pins of the Anea 96 interface.

Table 9-25 Pins of the Anea 96 interface

Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage

1 Rx1 25 Tx1

2 26

3 Rx2 27 Tx2

4 28

5 Rx3 29 Tx3

6 30

7 Rx4 31 Tx4

8 32

9 Rx5 33 Tx5

10 34

11 Rx6 35 Tx6

12 36

13 Rx7 37 Tx7

14 38

15 Rx8 39 Tx8

16 40

17 Rx9 41 Tx9

18 42

19 Rx10 43 Tx10

20 44

21 Rx11 45 Tx11

22 46

23 Rx12 47 Tx12

24 48

49 Rx13 73 Tx13

50 74


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Front View Connector Pin Usage Connector Pin Usage

51 Rx14 75 Tx14

52 76

53 Rx15 77 Tx15

54 78

55 Rx16 79 Tx16

56 80

9.6.5 Valid SlotsThe ML1 can be housed in any of slots 3 - 4.

9.6.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the ML1.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameters for the ML1:

E1 interface

To configure the E1 interface, set the general attributes, Layer 3 attributes, and advancedattributes of the E1 interface. In details, set the physical parameters, network-layer parameters,signal frame format, clock mode, and loopback mode for the E1 interface.

9.6.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the ML1 include the board dimensions, and weight.

10.3.6 ML1/ML1A lists the technical specifications of the ML1.

9.7 CD1This section describes the CD1, which is a 1 x channelized STM-1 service processing board, interms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CD1 is TND1.

9.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CD1 accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 services. When used with the CXPA/CXPG, the CD1processes the service signals. The CD1 supports the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, and theservice type can be flexibly configured.

9.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CD1 consists of the SDH processing module, line processing module, data processingmodule, management module, clock module, and power supply module.

9.7.4 Front Panel



9-43

On the front panel of the CD1, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.7.5 Valid SlotsThe CD1 can be housed in any of the two slots, that is, slots 3 and 4.

9.7.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CD1.

9.7.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CD1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

9.7.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the CD1 is TND1.

9.7.2 Functions and FeaturesThe CD1 accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 services. When used with the CXPA/CXPG, the CD1processes the service signals. The CD1 supports the IMA, CES, and ML-PPP protocols, and theservice type can be flexibly configured.

Table 9-26 lists functions and features of the CD1.

Table 9-26 Functions and features of the CD1

Function andFeature

Remarks

Basic function Service interfaces on thefront panel

Supports two channelized STM-1optical interfacesa.

Fractional E1 Supports the CES services and IMA services at 64 kibt/s level.

Interface function Automatic shutdownfunction of the laser at theport

Supported

Type of the loopback at theport

InloopOutloop


Supported

All the VC-12 timeslots of each CD1 interface support the DCNfunction. By default, the DCN function of only the first, seventeenth,thirty-third, and forty-ninth VC-12 timeslots of each optical interfacecan be enabled.Manually enables or disables the DCN function of the VC-12timeslots of the optical interface on the CD1.

ATM/IMA Number of supported ATME1 services

32

Number of supported IMAgroups

32


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Function andFeature

Remarks

Maximum number ofVC-12 timeslots or serialports in each IMA group

63

Dynamically enables or disables the IMA group, restarts the IMAgroup protocol, and dynamically adds or deletes the IMA groupmembers.





64


Encapsulates the ATM cells to the PW in the concatenation and non-concatenation modes. The number of PW connections that support thecell concatenation is 64, and the maximum number of concatenatedcells is 31.

ATM OAM on the UNI side Supports the CC test


CES Number of supported CESservicesb

63


Supports the timeslot compression function. Provides the idle 64 kbit/s timeslot suppression function for the CES services in the CESoPSNmode to save the transmission bandwidth.


The jitter buffer time of the CES service can be set. The jitter buffertime ranges from 0.375 ms to 16 ms, and the step value is 0.125 ms.

The encapsulation buffer time of the CES service can be set. Theencapsulation buffer time ranges from 0.125 ms to 5 ms, and the stepvalue is 0.125 ms.



9-45

Function andFeature

Remarks


7


16

Functions as the NNI interface, and functions as the UNI interface toaccess IP packets of the L3VPN services.

LMSP protection Supports the 1+1 LMSP and 1:1 LMSP protection schemes.

Extraction andinsertion of the S1byte

Supported


NOTEa: The second channelized STM-1 interface on the front panel cannot be used to carry services, and it canbe used for only the intra-board LMSP protection.

b: The CD1 board does not support the intra-board CES local services.

9.7.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe CD1 consists of the SDH processing module, line processing module, data processingmodule, management module, clock module, and power supply module.

Figure 9-14 shows the block diagram for working principle of the CD1.

Figure 9-14 Block diagram for the working principle of the CD1

SDH processing

module

Line processing

module

Data processing

module

Management module

Clock module

Power supply module

Backplane

Service signal

Service signal

Service signal

CXP

CXP

-48V/-60V

PIU

PIU

-48V/-60V

Management bus

Management busManagement busManagement bus

3.3V

1.2V

.

.

.

.

.

.

Channelized STM-1

Stand-by channelized

STM-1

Line clocksLine clocks

System clocksCXP

CXP


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

NOTE


Receive Direction

In the receive direction, the SDH processing module accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 servicesthrough the interface on the front panel. This module decapsulates the VC-12 timeslots from theSTM-1 signals, recovers the E1 signals, processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarmsignals, and sends the processed signals to the line processing module. Then, the line processingmodule rearranges the E1 frames, processes the rearranged signals according to the service type,and sends the signals to the data processing module for PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling.Finally, the signals are sent to the CXPA/CXPG through the interface on the backplane.

Transmit Direction

In the transmit direction, the data processing module receives the signals from the CXPA/CXPG, identifies the signals, performs the PWE3 decapsulation, and then sends the signals tothe line processing module. The line processing module processes various signals, schedulesqueues, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module. The SDH processingmodule maps the E1 signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots to theSTM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sends outthe STM-1 signals through the interface on the front panel.

SDH Processing Module


l In the receive direction, this module accesses 1 x channelized STM-1 signals, decapsulatesthe VC-12 timeslots from the STM-1 signals, obtains the E1 signals by demapping theVC-12 timeslots, and processes the overhead bytes, pointers, and alarm signals.

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the E1 signals from the line processingmodule, maps the signals to the VC-12 timeslots, multiplexes the VC-12 timeslots toSTM-1 signals, adds the overhead bytes and pointers, processes the alarm signals, and sendsout the 1 x channelized STM-1 signals through the interface on the backplane.

l When the service fails, this module realizes the LMSP protection. Thus, the service isswitched.

l This module extracts and recovers the line clocks.

Line Processing Module


l In the receive direction, this module receives the signals from the SDH processing module,rearranges the frames of the E1 signals, performs processing for various services such assetup and deletion of the IMA link, creation of the ML-PPP group, extraction of protocolpackets in the ML-PPP services, and suppression of timeslots of the CES services. Then,the processed signals are sent to the data processing module.



9-47

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the data processing module,processes various services, and sends the processed signals to the SDH processing module.

Data Processing ModuleThis module performs the following functions:

l In the receive direction, this module obtains the corresponding PW channel information ofeach E1 service, performs the PWE3 encapsulation and PW scheduling, and sends theprocessed signals to the CXPA/CXPG through the interface on the backplane.

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the signals from the CXPA/CXPG, identifiesdifferent service types, and performs the PWE3 decapsulation and service scheduling.

l In the case of the ATM E1 or IMA services, this module performs the VP/VC switchingfor the ATM cells, and processes the concatenated cells during the PWE3 encapsulation ordecapsulation.

Management ModuleWhen used with the CXPA/CXPG, this module manages and controls each module on the CD1.


l Processes the line clocks.

l Accesses and processes the system clock from the CXPA/CXPG, and provides the workingclock to each module on the CD1.

l Supports the SSM protocol.


l Accesses two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies.

l Supplies the working power for each module on the CD1.

9.7.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the CD1, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-15 shows the appearance of the front panel of the CD1.

Figure 9-15 Appearance of the front panel of the CD1


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the CD1:

l STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board status

l SRV indicator, red, orange, or green, which indicates service status

l LOS1 and LOS2 indicators, red or green, which indicate the port status


InterfacesTable 9-27 lists the amount, types, and usage of the interfaces on the CD1.

Table 9-27 Interfaces on the CD1



IN1 to IN2 LC Input interface for the channelized STM-1 opticalsignal.

OUT1 to OUT2 LC Output interface for the channelized STM-1optical signal.

9.7.5 Valid SlotsThe CD1 can be housed in any of the two slots, that is, slots 3 and 4.

9.7.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the CD1.

You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the CD1.

l J0

l J1

l J2

l C2

l V5

l SDH interface

l Automatic laser shutdown

l Spare timeslot recovery value

The descriptions of the parameters are as follows:

l The J0 byte is continually transmitted to carry section access point identifiers, accordingto which the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intended transmit end.

l The J1 byte is the path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the higherorder access point identifiers, according to which the receive end verifies the constant



9-49

connection to the intended transmit end. When detecting mismatch of the J1 bytes, thereceive end inserts the HP_TIM alarm in the corresponding path.

l The J2 byte is a VC-12 path tracing byte. The transmit end successively transmits the lowerorder access point identifiers based on the negotiation of the two ends. According to theseaccess point identifiers, the receive end verifies the constant connection to the intendedtransmit end in this path.

l The C2 byte is the signal label byte, which indicates the multiplexing structure of the VCframes and the payload property. The received C2 should be consistent with the transmittedC2. If the C2 bytes are mismatched, the local end inserts the HP_SLM alarm in thecorresponding VC-4 path.Table 9-28 lists the mapping relation between the service type and setting of the C2.

Table 9-28 Mapping relation between the service type and C2 byte

Input Service Type C2 Byte (in Hex)

TUG structure 02

ATM mapping 13

HDLC, PPP framed signal mapping 16

Unequipped 00

l As a path status and signal identification byte, the V5 byte detects the bit error and indicates

the remote fault and failure in the lower order path. Table 9-29 lists the mapping relationbetween the service type and V5 byte.

Table 9-29 Mapping relation between the service type and V5 byte

Input Service Type V5 Byte (in Hex)

Asynchronization 02

Unequipped or supervisory unequipped 00

l The attributes of an SDH interface cover the general attributes, Layer 2 attributes, Layer 3

attributes and advanced attributes. To configure an SDH interface, configure the physicalparameters, link layer parameters and network layer parameters.

l To configure the ALS is to set the parameters of the optical interface.

l To ensure the valid utilization of the path, the spare timeslots are eliminated when thesignals are encapsulated into the network. In this way, the TDM frame is partially stuffed.To recover the TDM frame at the service sink, the spare timeslots eliminated duringencapsulation are added again.

9.7.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the CD1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For the technical specifications of the CD1, see 10.3.7 CD1.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.8 IFE2This section describes the IFE2, which is a intermediate frequency (IF) board, with regard to theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFE2 is TND1.

9.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFE2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V DC power that the ODU requires.

9.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe IFE2 consists of the combiner interface module, IF processing module, MODEM module,SMODEM module, MUX/DEMUX module, control module, power module, and clock module.

9.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

9.8.5 Valid SlotsThe slot that houses the IFE2 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses theprocessing board used with the IFE2.

9.8.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the IFE2.

9.8.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the IFE2 include the IF performace, baseband signals processingperformance of the Modem, board dimensions, and weight.

9.8.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the IFE2 is TND1.

9.8.2 Functions and FeaturesThe IFE2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to theODU and the -48 V DC power that the ODU requires.

The functions and features of the IFE2 are as follows:

l IF Processing

– Supports the Adaptive Modulation function.

– Performs mapping and demapping between packet service signals and microwave framesignals.

– Codes and decodes microwave frame signals.

– Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals.

– Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals.

– Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V DC power supplies.



9-51

– Supports the automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function.l Overhead Processing

– Processes the overheads of the microwave frame.– Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

l Protection Processing– Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection.– Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.

l Maintenance Features– Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port.

NOTE

When the IF port works in Layer 3 mode, the loopback function is invalid because the IP protocolis used to process data packets.

– support the PRBS test for the IF ports.– Supports the detecting of the board temperature.– Supports cold resetting of the board.– Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.– Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

9.8.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe IFE2 consists of the combiner interface module, IF processing module, MODEM module,SMODEM module, MUX/DEMUX module, control module, power module, and clock module.

Figure 9-16 shows the block diagram for the functions of the IFE2.

Figure 9-16 Block diagram for the functions of the IFE2Backplane

Service signal

Control bus

IF MUX/DEMUX module

MODEMmodule

IF processing

module

Combiner interface module

Control module

Clock module

CXP

SMODEM module

Power module

CXP

CXPControl bus

HSM signalPaired board

ODU control signal

Service signal


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

NOTE


Combiner Interface Module

Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal in thereceive direction.

Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, andsends them to the IF cable in the transmit direction.

IF Processing Module

In the receive direction,l Controls the level of the service signal through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit.

l Filters the signal.

l Performs A/D conversion.

In the transmit direction,l Performs D/A conversion.

l Performs analog modulation.

MODEM Module

In the receive direction,l Performs digital demodulation.

l Performs time domain adaptive equalization.

l Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.

In the transmit direction,l Performs FEC coding.

l Performs digital modulation.

MUX/DEMUX Module

In the receive direction,l Detects the microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and

performance events.l Verifies the check code in the microwave frame and generates the corresponding alarms

and performance events.l Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms.

l Detects the changes in the ATPC message in the microwave frame and the changes in themicrowave RDI, and reports the changes to the CXPA/CXPG through the control module.



9-53

l Extracts the overheads from the microwave frame and sends it to the logic processingmodule.

l Extracts the packet service signals from the microwave frame and sends the signals to theCXPA/CXPG.

In the transmit direction,l Sets microwave frame overheads.

l Combines the packet service signals and microwave frame overheads to form microwaveframes.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the pairedboard. The MUX/DEMUX unit of the main IF board selects a better signal for later processing.

SMODEM ModuleIn the receive direction,l Demodulates the ODU control signal.

l Transmits the ODU control signal to the CXPA/CXPB/CXPG.

In the transmit direction, modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the CXPA/CXPB/CXPG.

Control ModuleControls the reading and writing on the chip, resetting of the chip, and fault detection on thechip.

Clock ModuleThis unit performs the following functions:

l Provides the working clock for each unit on the board.

l Detects and restores the link clock.



Power Modulel Supports two inputs of -48 V DC/-60 V DC power.

l Converts the input -48 V DC/-60 V DC power into the DC voltages required by the modulesand provides a backup for 3.3 V power.

l Provides -48 V power for the ODU.

9.8.4 Front PanelThere are indicators, an IF port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-17 shows the front panel of the IFE2.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 9-17 Front panel of the IFE2

IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the IFE2.

l Board status indicator (STAT) - three colors (red, orange, and green)

l Service status indicator (SRV) - three colors (red, orange, and green)

l Radio link status indicator (LINK) - one color (green)

l ODU status indicator (ODU) - three colors (red, orange, and green)

l Remote end status indicator (RMT) - one color (orange)

l Protection status indicator (ACT) - one color (green)


Interfaces

Table 9-30 IFE2 interface description

Interface Interface Type Usage

IF TNC IF port

ODU power switch

Table 9-31 ODU power switch

Switch Usage

ODU-PWRa ODU power switch

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull outthe switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switchis set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

LabelsThere is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidancelabel on the front panel.



9-55

l The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed70°C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55°C. In this case, you need to wearprotective gloves before touching the board.

l The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off beforethe IF cable is removed.

l The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightlybefore setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.

9.8.5 Valid SlotsThe slot that houses the IFE2 in the interface area is determined by the slot that houses theprocessing board used with the IFE2.

In the interface area, the IFE2 can be housed in .

When being configured in 1+1 FD/SD protection mode, the IFE2 boards must be housed inpaired slots..

9.8.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to set parameters for the IFE2.

You can use the U2000 to set the following parameter for the IFE2:

Microwave interface

To configure the microwave interface, set the general attributes, IF attributes, Layer 2 attributes,Layer 3 attributes, and advanced attributes of the E1 interface. In details, set the IF parameters,link-layer parameters, network-layer parameters, link identifier, and loopback mode for themicrowave interface.

9.8.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the IFE2 include the IF performace, baseband signals processingperformance of the Modem, board dimensions, and weight.

10.3.8 IFE2 lists the technical specifications of the IFE2.

9.9 ADS2A/ADS2BThis section describes the ADS2A/ADS2B, a 2-channel ADSL service interface board, in termsof the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

NOTE

The ADS2A and ADS2B have the same functions, except for supporting different modes. The ADS2Asupports the Annex A mode and the ADS2B supports the Annex B mode. The following refers the ADS2Aand ADS2B uniformly as ADS2.

9.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ADS2 is TND1.

9.9.2 Functions and FeaturesUsed with the CXPA, the ADS2 can process the asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL)services.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ADS2 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

9.9.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the ADS2, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.9.5 Valid SlotsThe ADS2 can be housed in any of slots 3-4. The ADS2, used with the CXPA, can process twochannels of ADSL signals.

9.9.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the ADS2.

9.9.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the ADS2 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

9.9.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the ADS2 is TND1.

9.9.2 Functions and FeaturesUsed with the CXPA, the ADS2 can process the asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL)services.

Table 9-32 lists the functions and features of the ADS2.

Table 9-32 Functions and Features of the ADS2


Basic Function Provides two ADSL interfaces and accesses 2 x ADSL signals.

Supports PVC pair setting for ports (eight PVC for each port).



Application scenario The ADS2 is applied in the offload scenario. On the access side,the OptiX PTN 910 performs ATM PWE3 emulation for theHSDPA service flow. Then, the emulated service isencapsulated in the tunnel required by the WMS network.Finally, the ADS2 performs ATM adaptation for the service.When entering the ADSL network, the encapsulated service istransported to the opposite equipment, then decapsulated, andfinally transported to the RNC node.

Compliant norms ITU-T G.994

ITU-T G.992.1 (G.dmt), Annex A, B

ITU-T G.992.2 (G.lite), Annex A, B

ANSI T1.413



9-57


ITU-T G.992.3 (ADSL2), Annex A, B

ITU-T G.992.5 (ADSL2+), Annex A, B

9.9.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe ADS2 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

Figure 9-18 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the ADS2.

Figure 9-18 Block diagram for the working principle of the ADS2Backplane

Clock module

Interface converting and control module

Logic control module

Parallel/serial converting

module

Service bus

Service bus


Status signal

Service access module

Two-channel ADSL signals

Line driver

ADSL transceiver

Clock signalsTo each module

Management bus

Power supply module

1.2 V2.5 V3.3 V5 V

-48V/-60V

-48V/-60V

PIU

PIU

Clock signalsCXP

CXP

CXP

CXP

NOTE


In the Transmit DirectionThe CXPA/CXPG sends the service signals to the ADS2. The parallel/serial converting moduleconverts and sends the signals to the logic control unit, which processes the signals. The ADSLtransceiver unit of the service access module adapts the service signals into the ADSL service.Then, the line driver amplifies the ADSL service and outputs it through the interface.

In the Receive DirectionThe ADSL interface accesses the ADSL signals. Then, the ADSL transceiver unit of the serviceaccess module stripes the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer from the ADSL signals and outputs


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

service signals. The logic control module processes the signals, and then sends the signals to thebackplane through the parallel/serial converting module.

Service Access Modulel The ADSL transceiver unit strips the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer from the ADSL service

accessed from the interface and then outputs the service.l The ADSL transceiver unit performs ATM AAL5 adaptation and encapsulation for the

service sent by the interface converting and control module and finally outputs the ADSLservice.

l The line driver unit amplifies the signals to be transmitted.

Interface Converting and Control ModuleThis module performs parallel/serial conversion for transporting the service between the systemcontrol board and the local board.

The system control board controls and manages the board through the serial management bus.In addition, the logic control unit detects alarms and reports them to the CXPA/CXPG throughthe serial management bus.

Clock ModuleThe clock module provides working clock signals to each module.

Power Supply ModuleThis module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.

9.9.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the ADS2, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-19 and Figure 9-20 show the appearance of the front panel of the ADS2.

Figure 9-19 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2A

Figure 9-20 Appearance of the front panel of the ADS2B



9-59

Indicatorsl STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board status.

l SRV indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates service alarms.

l LINK1 and LINK2 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status.


InterfacesTable 9-33 lists the types of the interfaces on the ADS2 and their respective usage.

Table 9-33 Types and usage of the interfaces on the ADS2



ADSL1, ADSL2 RJ-11 Accesses two channels of ADSLservices.

Table 9-34 lists the pins of the ADSL1 and ADSL2 interfaces.

Table 9-34 Pins of the ADSL1 and ADSL2 interface on the ADS2

Front View Pin No. Usage

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Unspecified

2 Unspecified

3 RING

4 TIP

5 Unspecified

6 Unspecified

9.9.5 Valid SlotsThe ADS2 can be housed in any of slots 3-4. The ADS2, used with the CXPA, can process twochannels of ADSL signals.

9.9.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the ADS2.

You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the ADS2.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

ADSL Interface

For details, see U2000 online help.

9.9.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the ADS2 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

For details on the technical specification, see 10.3.9 ADS2A/ADS2B.

9.10 SHD4This section describes the SHD4, a 4-channel G.SHDSL service interface board, in terms of theversion, functions, features, working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technicalspecifications.

9.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SHD4 is TND1.

9.10.2 Functions and FeaturesUsed with the CXPA, the SHD4 can process the G.991.2 single-pair high-speed digitalsubscriber line (G.SHDSL) service.

9.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SHD4 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

9.10.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the SHD4, there are indicators, and interfaces.

9.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SHD4 can be housed in any of slots 3-4. The SHD4, used with the CXPA, can process fourchannels of G.SHDSL signals.

9.10.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SDH4.

9.10.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the SHD4 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

9.10.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SHD4 is TND1.

9.10.2 Functions and FeaturesUsed with the CXPA, the SHD4 can process the G.991.2 single-pair high-speed digitalsubscriber line (G.SHDSL) service.

Table 9-35 lists the functions and features of the SHD4.



9-61

Table 9-35 Functions and Features of the SHD4


Basic function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces and accesses 4 x G.SHDSLsignals.

Supports the ATM mode and the EFM mode.

The outgoing lines of the four G.SHDSL interfaces support theM-Pair binding of lines. In addition, M can be 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Supports the G.SHDSL load sharing protection.


Clock Supplies the G.SHDSL line clock for CXPA as system clock.

Application scenario The SHD4 is applied in the offload scenario. On the access side,the OptiX PTN 910 performs ATM PWE3 emulation for theHSDPA service flow. Then, the emulated service isencapsulated in the tunnel required by the WMS network.Finally, the SHD4 performs ATM adaptation for the service.When entering the xDSL network, the encapsulated service istransported to the opposite equipment, then decapsulated, andfinally transported to the RNC node.

Compliant norms ETSI SDSL (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.1)

ETSI SDSL.bis (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.2)

ITU G.shdsl (ITU-T G.991.2)

ITU G.shdls.bis (ITU-T G.991.2 (2004))

ITU G.hs (ITU-T G.994.1)

IEEE 802.3ah clause 61

9.10.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SHD4 mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting module, clockmodule, and power supply module.

Figure 9-21 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 9-21 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4Backplane


Logic control

unit

Service bus

Management bus

Service bus


Status signal

Parallel/serial converting

module

Power supply module

1.2 V1.5 V3.3 V


Service encapsulation and bundling

module

Clock signals

4 x G.SHDSL signals

Signal voltage

and performs protection

module

To each module

Clock moduleEach module of the board

-48V/-60V

-48V/-60V

PIU

PIU

Clock signalsCXP

CXP

CXP

CXP

NOTE


In the Transmit Direction

The CXPA/CXPG sends the service signals to the parallel/serial converting module and then tothe logic control unit, which processes the service signals. Finally, the service encapsulation andbundling module decapsulates the service signals and outputs the G.SHDSL service.

In the Receive Direction

The service board accesses the G.SHDSL signals and the service access module transforms thesignal voltage and performs protection for the signals. Then, the service encapsulation andbundling module encapsulates and bundles the signals, adjusts the signal rate, frames the signals,and then sends the signals to the logic control module, which processes the service signals.Finally, the parallel/serial converting module converts and sends the service signals to theCXPA/CXPG.

Service Access Modulel The service access module transforms the signal voltage and performs protection for the

access signals. Then, the service encapsulation and bundling module bundles four channelsof G.SHDSL signals, strips the ATM AAL5 adaptation layer, and finally outputs the servicesignals.

l The interface converting and control module sends the service to the service encapsulationand bundling module, which then performs ATM AAL5 adaptation and encapsulation, andfinally outputs the G.SHDSL service.



9-63

Interface Converting and Control ModuleThis module performs parallel/serial conversion for transporting the service between the systemcontrol board and the local board.

The system control board controls and manages the board through the serial management bus.In addition, the logic control unit detects alarms and reports them to the CXPA/CXPG throughthe serial management bus.

Clock ModuleThe clock module provides working clock for each module on the SHD4.

Power Supply ModuleThis module provides DC voltages required by each module on the board.

9.10.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the SHD4, there are indicators, and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-22 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SHD4.

Figure 9-22 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4

Indicatorsl STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board status.

l SRV indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates service alarms

l LINK1/LINK2/LINK3/LINK4 indicators, green, which indicate the port connection status.


InterfacesTable 9-36 lists the types of the interfaces on the SHD4 and their respective usage.

Table 9-36 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4



SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 RJ-11 Accesses the first 4 x G.SHDSL services.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 9-37 lists the pins of theSHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces.

Table 9-37 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4


6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Unspecified

2 Unspecified

3 TIP

4 RING

5 Unspecified

6 Unspecified

9.10.5 Valid SlotsThe SHD4 can be housed in any of slots 3-4. The SHD4, used with the CXPA, can process fourchannels of G.SHDSL signals.

9.10.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SDH4.

You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the SHD4.

G.SHDSL Interface

For details, see U2000 online help.

9.10.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the SHD4 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, and weight.

For details on the technical specification, see 10.3.10 SHD4.

9.11 SHD4IThis section describes the SHD4I, a 4-channel SHDSL service interface board that supports theIMA mode, in terms of the version, functions, features, working principle, front panel, validslots, and technical specifications.

9.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SHD4I is TND1.

9.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SHD4I can access four channels of G.SHDSL signals encapsulated in the IMA format whenit is used with the CXPA.

9.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow



9-65

The SHD4I mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting and controlmodule, IMA processing module, clock module, and power supply module.

9.11.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the SHD4I, there are indicators and interfaces.

9.11.5 Valid SlotsThe SHD4I can be housed in slot 3 or slot 4.

9.11.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SHD4I.

9.11.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

9.11.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the SHD4I is TND1.

9.11.2 Functions and FeaturesThe SHD4I can access four channels of G.SHDSL signals encapsulated in the IMA format whenit is used with the CXPA.

Table 9-38 lists the functions and features of the SHD4I.

Table 9-38 Functions and Features of the SHD4I

Function andFeature

Description

Basic Function Provides four G.SHDSL interfaces to access four channels ofG.SHDSL signals.

Accesses the service signals encapsulated in the IMA format andsupports one IMA group.

Provides the G.SHDSL load sharing protection in the IMAencapsulation mode.

Supports the network timing recovery (NTR) function.

Supports the hot-swap function.

Compliant norms ETSI SDSL (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.1)

ETSI SDSL.bis (ETSI TS 101 524 V 1.2.2)

ITU G.shdsl (ITU-T G.991.2)

ITU G.shdls.bis (ITU-T G.991.2 (2004))

ITU G.hs (ITU-T G.994.1)


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.11.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe SHD4I mainly consists of the service access module, interface converting and controlmodule, IMA processing module, clock module, and power supply module.

Figure 9-23 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4I.

Figure 9-23 Block diagram for the working principle of the SHD4I



IMA processing module

Power supply module

Clock module

4 x G.SHDSL signals IMA service signals

IMA service signals

ATM cells

4 x NTR clock signalsClock signals

To each module on the SHD4I Working clock signals

Management and control bus

Management and control bus

Service signals


Status signal bus

-48 V/-60 V

-48 V/-60 V3.3 V1.8 V1.5 V1.2 V

CXP

CXP

CXP

CXP

PIU

PIU

To each module on the SHD4I

Backplane

NOTE


In the Receive Direction

The RJ-11 interfaces access the G.SHDSL signals to the service access module. Then, the serviceaccess module works with the IMA processing module to multiplexes the service signals, andsends the ATM cells to the interface converting and control module. The interface convertingand control module decapsulates the ATM frames, converts the parallel signals to serial signals,converges the serial signals to one channel service signal, and finally sends the service signal tothe backplane.

In the Transmit Direction

The interface converting and control module receives the service signal from the backplane,converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the signals in the ATM frame format,and then sends the ATM frames to the service access module. The service access moduleprocesses the ATM cells and work with the IMA processing module to inversely multiplexesthe ATM signals as IMA signals. Finally, the service access module sends the packets to theG.SHDSL interfaces.



9-67

Service Access Module

This module accesses the service packets in different modes according to the encapsulation modeof the G.SHDSL interfaces. In addition, this module has the thunder protection function.

l In the receive direction, this module converts the serial packets to parallel packets, andsends the parallel packets to the interface converting and control module.

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interfaceconverting and control module, converts the serial IMA service signals to parallel IMAservice signals, and finally sends the parallel IMA service signals to the G.SHDSLinterfaces.

l In addition, this module extracts the NTR clock signals from the G.SHDSL service signalsreceived and sends the clock signals to the clock module.

Interface Converting and Control Module

This module converges the G.SHDSL service signals to one channel service signal and workswith the CXPA/CXPG to manage and control the SHD4I.

l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the serviceaccess module, converts the IMA service signals, and sends the service signals to the IMAprocessing module, which multiplexes the service signals . Then, this module receives theATM cells from the IMA processing module, decapsulates the ATM frames, converts theparallel signals to serial signals, converges the signals to one channel service signal, andfinally sends the service signal to the backplane.

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signal from the backplane,converts the serial signal to parallel signal, encapsulates the service signal into ATMframes, and sends the ATM cells to the IMA processing module, which inverselymultiplexes the ATM signals. Then, this module receives IMA signals from the IMAprocessing module and finally sends the IMA signals to the service access module.

l In addition, this module works with the CXPA/CXPG to manage and control each moduleon the SHD4I.

IMA Processing Module


l In the receive direction, this module receives the IMA service signals from the interfaceconverting and control module, multiplexes the service signals as ATM signals, and finallysends the ATM signals to the interface converting and control module, which convergesthe signals.

l In the transmit direction, this module receives the service signals from the backplane afterthe interface converting and control module processes the service signals. Then, this moduleinversely multiplexes the ATM signals and sends the IMA service signals to the interfaceconverting and control module.

Clock Module


l Selects a clock source from the four channels of NTR clock signals and uploads the clocksignals to the CXPA/CXPG.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

l Provides working clock signals for each module on the SHD4I board.

Power Supply ModuleThis module provides the following DC voltages for the modules on the SHD4I board:

l 3.3 V

l 1.8 V

l 1.5 V

l 1.2 V

9.11.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the SHD4I, there are indicators and interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-24 shows the appearance of the front panel of the SHD4I.

Figure 9-24 Appearance of the front panel of the SHD4I

IndicatorThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the SHD4I:

l STAT indicator, red, orange or green, which indicates the board status.

l SRV indicator, red, orange, or green, which indicates service status.

l LINK1, LINK2, LINK3 and LINK4 indicators, green, which indicate the port connectionstatus.


InterfaceTable 9-39 lists the types of the interfaces on the SHD4I and their respective usage.

Table 9-39 Types and usage of the interfaces on the SHD4I



SHDSL1-SHDSL4 RJ-11 Input and output G.SHDSL signals.



9-69

Table 9-40 lists the pins of the SHDSL1-SHDSL4 interfaces.

Table 9-40 Pins of the SHDSL1 - SHDSL4 interfaces on the SHD4I


6 5 4 3 2 1

1 Unspecified

2 Unspecified

3 TIP

4 RING

5 Unspecified

6 Unspecified

9.11.5 Valid SlotsThe SHD4I can be housed in slot 3 or slot 4.

9.11.6 Board Configuration ReferenceYou can use the U2000 to configure parameters for the SHD4I.

You can use the U2000 to configure the following parameters for the SHD4I.

G.SHDSL Interface

For details, see the U2000 Online Help and the Configuration Guide.

9.11.7 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,and weight.

For details on the technical specifications of the SHD4I, see 10.3.11 SHD4I.

9.12 PIUThis section describes the PIU, a power input unit, in terms of the version, functions, features,working principle, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

9.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

9.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU, a power access board, supports the functions and features such as power access, powerprotection, lightning protection detection, and information reporting.

9.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe PIU mainly consists of the lighting protection and failure detection module, communicationunit module, and board in-position module.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

9.12.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators and power supply interfaces.9.12.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be housed in slot 5 in the chassis.9.12.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, and input voltage.

9.12.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the PIU is TNC1.

9.12.2 Functions and FeaturesThe PIU, a power access board, supports the functions and features such as power access, powerprotection, lightning protection detection, and information reporting.

Table 9-41 lists functions and features of the PIU.

Table 9-41 Functions and features of the PIU


Power access One PIU accesses two -48 V DC (or -60 V DC) power supplies forthe equipment.

Power protection The PIU protects the power supply against overcurrent and shortcircuit. In this way, the overcurrent is prevented from shockingboards and components on them.

Lightning protection The PIU protects the equipment against lightning and reports analarm if the protection fails.

Power backup The two DC power supplies back up each other.

9.12.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe PIU mainly consists of the lighting protection and failure detection module, communicationunit module, and board in-position module.

Figure 9-25 shows the block diagram for the working principle of the PIU.

Figure 9-25 Block diagram for the working principle of the PIU

Lightning protection and failure detection module

-48 V/-60 V

Communication

Board in-position module

Backplane

Inter-board communication bus CXP

CXP

-48 V/-60 V

Board in-position signals

Lightning protection failure alarm signals

Each board

Each board

Lightning protection failure alarm signals

Lightning protection and failure detection module



9-71

NOTE


Lighting Protection and Failure Detection ModuleThis module protects the equipment against lightning and detects the failure of the anti-lightningcircuit. If the lightning protection fails, the PIU reports the alarm signals to the CXPA.

Communication Unit ModuleThis module has the function of reporting the board manufacturing information, PCB versioninformation, and alarm signals about the lightning protection failure.

Board In-Position ModuleThis module reports the board in-position signals to the CXPA.

9.12.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the PIU, there are indicators and power supply interfaces.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-26 shows the appearance of the front panel of the PIU.

Figure 9-26 Appearance of the front panel of the PIU

IndicatorsThe following indicator is present on the front panel of the PIU.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

PWRA/PWRB, green, which indicates the power supply status. When PWRA/PWRB is on andgreen, it indicates that power is accessed.


InterfacesThe PIU accesses two power supplies. Table 9-42 lists the types of the interfaces on the PIUand their respective usage. For cable corresponding to the interfaces, see Power Cables andProtection Grounding Cables.

Table 9-42 Types and usage of the interfaces on the PIU

Interfaceon theFrontPanel


NEG1(-) -48 V power inputinterface

Inputs -48 V power.

RTN1(+) BGND power inputinterface

Inputs BGND power.

NEG2(-) -48 V power inputinterface

Inputs -48 V power.

RTN2(+) BGND power inputinterface

Inputs BGND power.

LabelOperation warning label: indicates the following precaution, which should be taken for removalor insertion of the PIU board.

CAUTIONMultiple power supplies are accessed for the equipment. When powering off the equipment,make sure that these power supplies are disabled.Do not remove or insert the board with power on.

9.12.5 Valid SlotsThe PIU can be housed in slot 5 in the chassis.

9.12.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, and input voltage.

For details on the technical specification, see 10.3.12 PIU.



9-73

9.13 FANThis section describes the FAN, a fan board, in terms of the version, functions, features, workingprinciple, front panel, valid slots, and technical specifications.

9.13.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

9.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.

9.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe FAN mainly consists of the start-delay module, communication unit module, intelligent fanspeed adjustment module, and board in-position module.

9.13.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, anti-static wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

9.13.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN can be housed in slot 6 in the chassis.

9.13.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, and input voltage.

9.13.1 Version DescriptionThe functional version of the FAN is TNC1.

9.13.2 Functions and FeaturesThe FAN is used to adjust the fan rotating speed, detect and report status of fans.

The functions and features of the FAN are as follows:

l Accesses one 12 V power supply for driving three fans that each consumes 6 W power.

l Provides start-delay for the power supply of the fans and protects fans againstovercurrent.

l Intelligently adjusts the rotating speed of fans to ensure proper heat dissipation of thesystem.

l Reports information about the fan rotating speed, environment temperature, alarms, versionnumber, and board in-position information.

l Provides alarm indicators.

9.13.3 Working Principle and Signal FlowThe FAN mainly consists of the start-delay module, communication unit module, intelligent fanspeed adjustment module, and board in-position module.

Figure 9-27shows the block diagram for the working principle of the FAN.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure 9-27 Block diagram for the working principle of the FAN

Fans x 3

12 V power shut signals

12V

Inter-board communication bus

Board in-position module

PWM signals

Communication unit module

Start-delay module CXP

Fan-speed signals

Fan in-position signals

12 V

12 V

12 V

CXP

CXP

CXP

CXPIntelligent fan speed adjustment module

PWM driver module

Fan-speed reporting module

Backplane

NOTE


Start-delay Module

This module has the function of provides start-delay to the power supply for fans and protectsfans against overcurrent.

Communication Unit Module

This module reports the board manufacturing information, PCB version, and environmenttemperature information. In addition, this module provides 12 V power shut signals to the start-delay module.

Intelligent Fan Speed Adjustment Module

This module reports information about the fan rotating speed to the CXPA and adjusts the fanrotating speed according to the three pulse-width modulation (PWM) signals received from theCXPA. The PWM signal of one fan is isolated from that of another.



9-75

Board In-Position ModuleThis module reports the board in-position signals to the CXPA.

9.13.4 Front PanelOn the front panel of the FAN, there are indicators, anti-static wrist strap jack, handle, and labels.

Appearance of the Front PanelFigure 9-28 shows the appearance of the front panel of the FAN.

Figure 9-28 Appearance of the front panel

IndicatorsThe following indicators are present on the front panel of the FAN:

FAN indicator, red or green, which indicates status of fans.


Anti-Static Wrist Strap JackThe anti-static wrist strap should be connected to this jack for proper grounding of the humanbody.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

HandleThe handle is used for pushing the FAN into or pulling the FAN out of the chassis during boardreplacement.

LabelThe following labels are present on the front panel of the FAN:

l ESD protection label, which indicates that the equipment is static-sensitive.

l Fan warning label, which says that do not touch the fan leaves before the fan stops rotating.

9.13.5 Valid SlotsThe FAN can be housed in slot 6 in the chassis.

9.13.6 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, and input voltage.

For details on the technical specification, see 10.3.13 FAN.



9-77

10 Technical Specifications

About This Chapter

The technical specifications of the OptiX PTN 910 include the specifications of the integratedequipment, system specifications, board specifications, and performance specifications.

10.1 Specifications of the Integrated EquipmentIn the case of the OptiX PTN 910, the specifications of the integrated equipment include thetechnical specifications of the chassis.

10.2 System Performance SpecificationsDifferent performance items for the OptiX PTN 910 have different performance specifications.

10.3 Technical Specifications of BoardsTechnical specifications of boards cover specifications of interfaces, dimensions, and weight ofboards.

10.4 Technical Specifications of Optical InterfacesThe OptiX PTN 910 equipment supports optical interfaces such as GE, FE, and STM-1 opticalinterfaces.

10.5 Laser Safety ClassAccording to the optical power output by the laser, the safety class of the laser of the OptiX PTN910 is class 1.

10.6 RF PerformanceThis topic describes the radio frequency (RF) performance and various technical specificationsrelated to microwaves.

10.7 Specifications of Clock InterfacesClock interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 and synchronization performance of the equipmentcomply with related ITU-T standards.

10.8 Reliability SpecificationsReliability specifications of the OptiX PTN 910 mainly include the system availability, systemmean annual repair rate, MTTR system mean repair time, and MTBF system mean fault interval.

10.9 EMC Performance SpecificationsThe OptiX PTN 910 has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description 10 Technical Specifications


10-1

10.10 Safety CertificationsThe OptiX PTN 910 is awarded with multiple safety certificates.

10.11 Environment RequirementsIn the case of storage, transportation, and operation, the environment of OptiX PTN 910 shouldcomply with ETS 300 019, IEC68-2-x, ETS300 753, and GR-63.

10 Technical SpecificationsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

10.1 Specifications of the Integrated EquipmentIn the case of the OptiX PTN 910, the specifications of the integrated equipment include thetechnical specifications of the chassis.

Table 10-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX PTN 910 chassis.

Table 10-1 Technical specifications of the chassis

TechnicalSpecifications

Description

Dimensions (mm) 442 (width) x 220 (depth) x 1 U (height, 1 U = 44.45 mm)

Weight (kg) Empty chassis: 2.36Fully configured chassis: 4.8

Power consumption andheat consumption (withtypical configuration) (W)

l Typical configuration IPower consumption: 54Heat consumption: 54Typical configuration: 1 x CXPA + 1 x FAN + 1 x PIU + 1 xEG2

l Typical configuration IIPower consumption: 72Heat consumption: 67Typical configuration: 1 x CXPA + 1 x FAN + 1 x PIU + 1 xEF8F + 1 x EG2

l Typical configuration IIIPower consumption: 56Heat consumption: 56Typical configuration: 1 x CXPA + 1 x FAN + 1 x PIU + 1 xSHD4

l Typical configuration IVPower consumption: 59Heat consumption: 59Typical configuration: 1 x CXPA + 1 x FAN + 1 x PIU + 1 xADS2A

l Typical configuration VPower consumption: 118Heat consumption: 118Typical configuration: 1 x CXPA + 1 x FAN + 1 x PIU + 1 xIFE2 + 1 x ODU

Power consumption andheat consumption (withmaximum configuration)(W)

Power consumption: 120 (without microwave)Power consumption: 210 (with microwave)Heat consumption: 120



10-3

TechnicalSpecifications

Description

Voltage range (V, DC) - 38.4 to - 72.0

10.2 System Performance SpecificationsDifferent performance items for the OptiX PTN 910 have different performance specifications.

Table 10-2 lists the system performance specifications of the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 10-2 System performance specifications

Item Performance Specifications

Number of VLAN tags supported 4k

Number of tunnel supported (include MPLStunnel, TMPLS tunnel, IP tunnel and GREtunnel)

512

Number of PWs supported by the equipment 1024

Number of E-line services 1024

Number of L3VPN 30

Number of supported routes 512

Route protocol supported NNI: IS-IS, MP-BGPUNI: OSPF, BGP, RIP

Number of supported LAG groups 16

Number of APS 128

10.3 Technical Specifications of BoardsTechnical specifications of boards cover specifications of interfaces, dimensions, and weight ofboards.

10.3.1 CXPA/CXPBThe technical specifications of the CXPA/CXPB include the optical interface specifications,board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.3.2 CXPG/CXPHThe technical specifications of the CXPG cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.3 EF8TThe technical specifications of the EF8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

10.3.4 EF8FThe technical specifications of the EF8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.5 EG2The technical specifications of the EG2 include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.6 ML1/ML1AThe technical specifications of the ML1/ML1A include the interface specifications, dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.7 CD1The technical specifications of the CD1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.8 IFE2The technical specifications of the IFE2 include the IF performace, baseband signals processingperformance of the Modem, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.3.9 ADS2A/ADS2BThe technical specifications of the ADS2A/ADS2B cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.3.10 SHD4The technical specifications of the SHD4 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, weight, and power consumption.

10.3.11 SHD4IThe technical specifications of the SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

10.3.12 PIUThe technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,and input voltage.

10.3.13 FANThe technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, powerconsumption, and input voltage.

10.3.1 CXPA/CXPBThe technical specifications of the CXPA/CXPB include the optical interface specifications,board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Interface SpecificationsThe interface specifications of the CXPA/CXPB are as follows:

l For specifications of FE electrical interfaces, see Table 10-3.

l For specifications of E1 interfaces, see Table 10-4.



10-5

Table 10-3 Specifications of FE electrical interfaces

Item Specification

Electrical interface rate 100 Mbit/s

RJ-45 electrical interface specification The specifications of the RJ-45 electricalinterfaces comply with the followingregulations:l IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations

Table 10-4 Specifications of E1 interfaces

Item Specification Requirement

Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048

Interface impedance 75 ohms (CXPA)120 ohms (CXPB)

Interface code HDB3

Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703

Attenuation of the input interface at thepoint with a frequency of 1024 kHz (dB)

0 to 6

Anti-interference capability of the inputinterface

Complies with ITU-T G.703

Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G.823

Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823

Other Specifications

Other specifications of the CXPA/CXPB are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 226.00 (D) x 388.40 (W)

l Weight (kg): 1.25

l Power consumption (W): 45.7

10.3.2 CXPG/CXPHThe technical specifications of the CXPG cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Interface Specifications

The interface specifications of the CXPG are as follows:


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

l For the specifications of the FE electrical interface, see Table 10-5.

l For the specifications of the GE optical interface, see Table 10-6.

l For the specifications of the E1 interface, see Table 10-8.

Table 10-5 Specifications of the FE/GE electrical interface


FE electrical interface

Interface rate 100 Mbit/s.

RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification

Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterpriseregulations.

Table 10-6 Specifications of the GE interface

Item Specification

Opticalinterface type

Bidirectional two-fiber

1000BASE-SX(0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX(10 km)

1000BASE-VX(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX(80 km)

1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)

Fiber type Multimode Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode Single-mode

Centerwavelength(nm)

770 to 860 1270 to1360

1270 to1360

1500 to 1580 For details onthe allocationof workingwavelengths,see Table10-7.

Meanlaunchedoptical power(dBm)

-9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5

Receiversensitivity(dBm)

-17 -19 -22 -22 -28

Minimumoverheadpoint (dBm)

0 -3 -3 -3 -9

Extinctionratio (dB)

9 9 9 9 8.2



10-7

Item Specification

Opticalmodule code

34060286 3406047334060290

34060298 3406036034060324

For details,see Table10-7.

NOTEFor details of the optical module, see B.2 Optical Module Labels.

Table 10-7 Wavelength allocation of the 1000BASE-CWDM optical interface and relatedoptical module code

No. Opticalmodule code

Wavelength(nm)

No. Opticalmodule code

Wavelength(nm)

1 34060483 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5

2 34060481 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5

3 34060479 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5

4 34060482 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5

Table 10-8 Specifications of the E1 interface



Interface impedance 75 ohms (CXPG)120 ohms (CXPH)

Interface code HDB3

Pulse waveform at the output interface Complies with ITU-T G.703

Attenuation of the input interface at thepoint with a frequency of 1024 kHz(dB)

0 to 6

Anti-interference capability of the inputinterface




Other SpecificationsBoard dimensions (mm): 20.3 (H) x 226.0 (D) x 388.4 (W)

Board weight (kg): 1.32


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Power consumption (W): 49.2

10.3.3 EF8TThe technical specifications of the EF8T include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-9 lists the specifications of the electrical interfaces of the EF8T.

Table 10-9 Specifications of interfaces on the EF8T

Item Specification

FE electrical signal interface rate 100 Mbit/s

RJ-45 electrical interfacespecification

Complies with IEEE 802.3 and enterprise regulations.

Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)

Weight (kg): 0.53


10.3.4 EF8FThe technical specifications of the EF8F include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-10 lists the specifications of the optical interfaces of the EF8F.

Table 10-10 Specifications of the interfaces on the EF8F

Item Specification

Optical interfacetype


100BASE-FX(15 km)

100BASE-FX(40 km)

100BASE-FX(80 km)

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Workingwavelength range(nm)

1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launchedoptical power (dBm)

- 15 to - 8 - 5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver sensitivity(dBm)

-28 -34 -34

Min. overhead point(dBm)

-8 -10 -10



10-9

Item Specification

Extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10

Optical module code 3406027634060307

3406028134060308

3406028234060309



Weight (kg): 0.55


10.3.5 EG2The technical specifications of the EG2 include the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-11 list the specifications of the interfaces on the EG2.

Table 10-11 Specifications of the optical interfaces on the EG2

Item Specification

Opticalinterface type


1000BASE-SX(0.5 km)

1000BASE-LX(10 km)

1000BASE-VX(40 km)

1000BASE-ZX(80 km)

1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)

Fiber type Multi-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Workingwavelengthrange (nm)

770 to 860 1270 to 1360 1270 to 1360 1500 to 1580 For detailsonwavelengthallocation,see Table10-12.

Meanlaunchedoptical power(dBm)

-9.5 to 0 -11 to -3 - 5 to 0 -2 to 5 0 to 5

Receiversensitivity(dBm)

-17 -19 -22 -22 -28

Min. overheadpoint (dBm)

0 -3 -3 -3 -9


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Item Specification

Extinctionratio (dB)

9 9 9 9 8.2

Opticalmodule code

34060286 3406047334060290

34060298 3406036034060324

For details,see Table10-12.


Table 10-12 Allocation of central wavelengths of 1000BASE-CWDM interfaces and relatedoptical module code

SN Opticalmodule code

Wavelength(nm)

SN Opticalmodule code

Wavelength (nm)

1 34060483 1464.5 to1477.5

5 34060478 1544.5 to 1557.5

2 34060481 1484.5 to1497.5

6 34060476 1564.5 to 1577.5

3 34060479 1504.5 to1517.5

7 34060477 1584.5 to 1597.5

4 34060482 1524.5 to1537.5

8 34060480 1604.5 to 1617.5


Weight (kg): 0.52


10.3.6 ML1/ML1AThe technical specifications of the ML1/ML1A include the interface specifications, dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-13 lists the specifications of the interfaces on the ML1/ML1A.

Table 10-13 Specifications of the interfaces on the ML1/ML1A



Interface impedance 75 ohms (ML1)120 ohms (ML1A)



10-11


Interface code HDB3

Pulse waveform at the outputinterface


Attenuation of the input interfaceat the point with a frequency of1024 kHz (dB)

0 to 6

Anti-interference capability of theinput interface





Weight (kg): 0.56


10.3.7 CD1The technical specifications of the CD1 cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-14 lists the specifications of interfaces on the CD1.

Table 10-14 Specifications of the interfaces on the CD1


Optical interfacetype


S-1.1(15 km)

L-1.1(40 km)

L-1.2(80 km)

Fiber type Single-mode Single-mode Single-mode

Working wavelengthrange (nm)

1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

Mean launchedoptical power (dBm)

-15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

Receiver sensitivity(dBm)

-28 -34 -34

Minimum overheadpoint (dBm)

-8 -10 -10

Extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 10 10


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


Optical module code 3406027634060307

3406028134060308

3406028234060309





10.3.8 IFE2The technical specifications of the IFE2 include the IF performace, baseband signals processingperformance of the Modem, board dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

IF Performance

Table 10-15 IF performance

Item Performance

IF service signal Transmit frequencyof the IF board(MHz)

350

Receive frequency ofthe IF board (MHz)

140

ODU O&M signal Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequencyof the IF board(MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency ofthe IF board (MHz)

10

Impedance (ohm) 50

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem

Table 10-16 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem

Item Description

Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding.



10-13

Item Description

Adaptivetimedomainequalizer forbaseband signals

supported.

Other SpecificationsOther specifications of the IFE2 are as follows:

l Board dimensions (mm): 20.32 (H) x 225.75 (D) x 193.80 (W)

l Weight (kg): 0.53

l Power consumption (W): 21.6

NOTE

The preceding power consumption is the power consumption for only the IFE2. For details on the powerconsumption of the ODU, see the ODU Hardware Description.

10.3.9 ADS2A/ADS2BThe technical specifications of the ADS2A/ADS2B cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-17 and Table 10-18 list the performance specifications of the ADS2A/ADS2B.

Table 10-17 Performance specifications of the ADS2A

Interface Max. Upstream Rate Max. DownstreamRate

TransmissionDistance

ADSL standard 0.896 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 5.5 km

ADSL2 1.2 Mbit/s 15 Mbit/s 5.5 km

ADSL2+ 1.2 Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 5.5 km

Table 10-18 Performance specifications of the ADS2B

Interface Max. Upstream Rate Max. DownstreamRate

TransmissionDistance

ADSL standard 0.896 Mbit/s 8 Mbit/s 4 km

ADSL2 1.2 Mbit/s 15 Mbit/s 4 km

ADSL2+ 1.2 Mbit/s 24 Mbit/s 4 km



Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Weight (kg): 0.54

ADS2A Power consumption (W): 10.5

ADS2B Power consumption (W): 10.4

10.3.10 SHD4The technical specifications of the SHD4 cover the performance specifications, boarddimensions, weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-19 lists the performance specifications of the SHD4.

Table 10-19 Performance specifications of the SHD4

Interface

Max. UpstreamRate

Max.DownstreamRate

Max. Four-LineBundlingRate

Max.TransmissionDistance

G.SHDSL

5.7 Mbit/s 5.7 Mbit/s 23 Mbit/s 5.25 km


Weight (kg): 0.60


10.3.11 SHD4IThe technical specifications of the SHD4I cover the interface specifications, board dimensions,weight, and power consumption.

Table 10-20 lists the specifications of the interfaces of the SHD4I.

Table 10-20 Specifications of the interfaces of the SHD4I

Interface Max.Upstream Rate(Mbit/s)

Max.DownstreamRate (Mbit/s)

Max. Rate ofFour BundledInterfaces(Mbit/s)

Max.TransmissionDistance (km)

G.SHDSL 2.3 2.3 9.2 5.25






10-15

10.3.12 PIUThe technical specifications of the PIU cover the board dimensions, weight, power consumption,and input voltage.

Table 10-21 lists the technical specifications of the PIU.

Table 10-21 Technical specifications of the PIU

Item Technical Specification

Board dimensions (mm) 41.4 (H) x 224.8 (D) x 21.0 (W)

Weight (kg) 0.12

Power consumption (W) 0.5

Input voltage (V) -38.4 to -72.0

10.3.13 FANThe technical specifications of the FAN cover the board dimensions, weight, powerconsumption, and input voltage.

Table 10-22 lists the technical specifications of the FAN.

Table 10-22 Technical specifications of the FAN

Item Technical Specification

Board dimensions (mm) 42.0 (H) x 217.6 (D) x 28.5 (W)

Weight (kg) 0.20

Power consumption (W) 2.3 W

Working voltage (V) 12 V DC power

10.4 Technical Specifications of Optical InterfacesThe OptiX PTN 910 equipment supports optical interfaces such as GE, FE, and STM-1 opticalinterfaces.

Table 10-23 lists the technical specifications of optical interfaces.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 10-23 Technical specifications of optical interfaces

Rate Optical InterfaceType

FiberType

WorkingWavelengthRange(nm)

MeanLaunchedOpticalPower(dBm)

ReceiverSensitivity(dBm)

MinimumOverload(dBm)

GE Bidirectional two-fiber

1000BASE-SX(0.5km)

Multi-mode

770 to 860 -9.5 to 0 -17 0

1000BASE-LX(10km)

Single-mode

1270 to 1360 -11 to -3 -19 -3

1000BASE-VX(40km)

Single-mode

1270 to 1360 -5 to 0 -22 -3

1000BASE-ZX(80km)

Single-mode

1500 to 1580 -2 to 5 -22 -3

1000BASE-CWDM(80km)

Single-mode

See Table10-24.

0 to 5 -28 -9

FE Bidirectional two-fiber

100BASE-FX(15km)

Single-mode

1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8

100BASE-FX(40km)

Single-mode

1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10

100BASE-FX(80km)

Single-mode

1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10

STM-1


S-1.1(15km)

Single-mode

1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8

L-1.1(40km)

Single-mode

1263 to 1360 -5 to 0 -34 -10

L-1.2(80km)

Single-mode

1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10



10-17

Table 10-24 Wavelength allocation for 1000BASE-CWDM optical interfaces

SN Wavelength (nm) SN Wavelength (nm)

1 1464.5 to 1477.5 5 1544.5 to 1557.5

2 1484.5 to 1497.5 6 1564.5 to 1577.5

3 1504.5 to 1517.5 7 1584.5 to 1597.5

4 1524.5 to 1537.5 8 1604.5 to 1617.5

10.5 Laser Safety ClassAccording to the optical power output by the laser, the safety class of the laser of the OptiX PTN910 is class 1.

DANGERBecause laser beams from inside of the fiber can cause permanent eye damage, avoid direct eyeexposure to the optical interface during installation and maintenance.

When the laser safety class of an optical interface is class 1, the maximum optical power outputat the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

The laser safety class of the CD1, CXPG/CXPH, EG2 and EF8F board is class 1.

10.6 RF PerformanceThis topic describes the radio frequency (RF) performance and various technical specificationsrelated to microwaves.

10.6.1 Microwave Work ModesThis topic lists the microwave work modes that are supported by the OpitX PTN 910.

10.6.2 Frequency BandThe ODUs of the different series and different types support different operating frequency bands.

10.6.3 Receiver SensitivityThe receiver sensitivity reflects the anti-fading capability of the microwave equipment.

10.6.4 Transceiver PerformanceThe performance of the transceiver includes the nominal maximum/minimum transmit power,nominal maximum receive power, and frequency stability.

10.6.5 IF PerformanceThe IF performance includes the performance of the IF signal and the performance of the ODUO&M signal.

10.6.6 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the Modem


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

The baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the FEC coding schemeand the performance of the baseband time domain adaptive equalizer.

10.6.1 Microwave Work ModesThis topic lists the microwave work modes that are supported by the OpitX PTN 910.

Table 10-25 Microwave work modes

ChannelSpacing (MHz)

ModulationMode

Air InterfaceServiceCapacity(Mbit/s)

EthernetThroughput(Mbit/s)

MaximumNumber ofCES E1s

7 QPSK 10 9 to 11 4

7 16QAM 20 19 to 23 8

7 32QAM 25 24 to 29 10

7 64QAM 32 31 to 37 13

7 128QAM 38 37 to 44 16

7 256QAM 44 43 to 51 18

14 (13.75) QPSK 20 20 to 23 8

14 (13.75) 16QAM 42 41 to 48 17

14 (13.75) 32QAM 51 50 to 59 21

14 (13.75) 64QAM 66 65 to 76 28

14 (13.75) 128QAM 78 77 to 90 33

14 (13.75) 256QAM 90 90 to 104 38

28 (27.5) QPSK 42 41 to 48 17

28 (27.5) 16QAM 84 84 to 97 35

28 (27.5) 32QAM 105 108 to 125 46

28 (27.5) 64QAM 133 130 to 150 57

28 (27.5) 128QAM 158 160 to 180 67

28 (27.5) 256QAM 183 180 to 210 78

56 (55) QPSK 84 84 to 97 35

56 (55) 16QAM 168 170 to 190 72

56 (55) 32QAM 208 210 to 240 89

56 (55) 64QAM 265 260 to 310 113

56 (55) 128QAM 313 310 to 360 134



10-19

ChannelSpacing (MHz)

ModulationMode

Air InterfaceServiceCapacity(Mbit/s)

EthernetThroughput(Mbit/s)

MaximumNumber ofCES E1s

56 (55) 256QAM 363 360 to 420 156

NOTE

l The channel spacings 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, and 55 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band.

l The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the product. Thechannel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

l Both the Ethernet service and the CES E1 service require a specific amount of air interface service capacity.Thus, only either of them can be allocated with the maximum service capacity at one time.

10.6.2 Frequency BandThe ODUs of the different series and different types support different operating frequency bands.

Frequency Bands (Standard Power ODU)

Table 10-26 Frequency band (SP ODUs)

FrequencyBand

Frequency Range (GHz) T/R Spacing (MHz)

7 GHz 7.093 to 7.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245

8 GHz 7.731 to 8.496 119, 126, 266, 311.32

11 GHz 10.675 to 11.745 490, 500, 530

13 GHz 12.751 to 13.248 266

15 GHz 14.403 to 15.348 315, 322, 420, 490, 728

18 GHz 17.685 to 19.710 1008, 1010, 1560

23 GHz 21.200 to 23.618 1008, 1200, 1232

26 GHz 24.549 to 26.453 1008

38 GHz 37.044 to 39.452 1260

Table 10-27 Frequency band (SPA ODUs)

FrequencyBand


6 GHz 5.915 to 6.425 (L6)6.425 to 7.125 (U6)

252.04 (L6)340 (U6)


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Frequency Bands (High Power ODU)

Table 10-28 Frequency band (HP ODUs)

FrequencyBand


7 GHz 7.093 to 7.897 154, 161, 168, 196, 245

8 GHz 7.731 to 8.497 119, 126, 151.614, 208, 266, 311.32

11 GHz 10.675 to 11.745 490, 500, 530

13 GHz 12.751 to 13.248 266

15 GHz 14.400 to 15.353 315, 322, 420, 490, 644, 728

18 GHz 17.685 to 19.710 1008, 1010, 1560

23 GHz 21.200 to 23.618 1008, 1200, 1232

26 GHz 24.549 to 26.453 1008

32 GHz 31.815 to 33.383 812

38 GHz 37.044 to 40.105 700, 1260

10.6.3 Receiver SensitivityThe receiver sensitivity reflects the anti-fading capability of the microwave equipment.

NOTE

l For a guaranteed value, remove 3 dB from the typical value.

l The 6 GHz ODU does not support the modulation mode of 256QAM and the channel spacing of 56MHz. The value of the receiver sensitivity is unavailable (NA) in the case of the 6 GHz ODU.

Table 10-29 Typical receiver sensitivity values (i)

Item

Performance (at 7 MHz Channel Spacing)

QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM

RSL@ BER = 10-6 (unit: dBm)

@6GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5 NA

@7GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5

@8GHz -92.5 -86.5 -82.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5

@11GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 -76 -73

@13GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 -76 -73

@15GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 -76 -73



10-21

Item



@18GHz -92 -86 -82 -79 -76 -73

@23GHz -91.5 -85.5 -81.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5

@26GHz -91 -85 -81 -78 -75 -72

@32GHz -90 -84 -80 -77 -74 -71

@38GHz -89.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5

Table 10-30 Typical receiver sensitivity values (ii)

Item




@6GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 NA

@7GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5

@8GHz -90.5 -83.5 -79.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5

@11GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 -70

@13GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 -70

@15GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 -70

@18GHz -90 -83 -79 -76 -73 -70

@23GHz -89.5 -82.5 -78.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5

@26GHz -89 -82 -78 -75 -72 -69

@32GHz -88 -81 -77 -74 -71 -68

@38GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5

Table 10-31 Typical receiver sensitivity values (iii)

Item




@6GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 NA

@7GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Item



@8GHz -87.5 -80.5 -76.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5

@11GHz -87 -80 -76 -73 -70 -67

@13GHz -87 -80 -76 -73 -70 -67

@15GHz -87 -80 -76 -73 -70 -67

@18GHz -87 -80 -76 -73 -70 -67

@23GHz -86.5 -79.5 -75.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5

@26GHz -86 -79 -75 -72 -69 -66

@32GHz -85 -78 -74 -71 -68 -65

@38GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

Table 10-32 Typical receiver sensitivity values (iv)

Item




@6GHz NA NA NA NA NA NA

@7GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

@8GHz -84.5 -77.5 -73.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5

@11GHz -84 -77 -73 -70 -67 -64

@13GHz -84 -77 -73 -70 -67 -64

@15GHz -84 -77 -73 -70 -67 -64

@18GHz -84 -77 -73 -70 -67 -64

@23GHz -83.5 -76.5 -72.5 -69.5 -66.5 -63.5

@26GHz -83 -76 -72 -69 -66 -63

@32GHz -82 -75 -71 -68 -65 -62

@38GHz -81.5 -74.5 -70.5 -67.5 -64.5 -61.5

10.6.4 Transceiver PerformanceThe performance of the transceiver includes the nominal maximum/minimum transmit power,nominal maximum receive power, and frequency stability.



10-23

Transceiver Performance (Standard Power ODU)

Table 10-33 Transceiver performance (SP ODUs)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/32QAM

64QAM/128QAM

256QAM

Nominal maximum transmit power (dBm)

@7 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5

@8 GHz 27 22.5 18.5 16.5

@11 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@13 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@15 GHz 26 21.5 17.5 15.5

@18 GHz 25.5 21.5 17.5 15.5

@23 GHz 24 20.5 16.5 14.5

@26 GHz 23.5 19.5 15.5 13.5

@38 GHz 22 17.5 13.5 11.5

Nominalminimumtransmit power(dBm)

-6

Nominalmaximumreceive power(dBm)

-20 -25

Frequencystability (ppm)

±5

Table 10-34 Transceiver performance (SPA ODUs)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM


@6 GHz 26.5 24.0 23.0

Nominal minimumtransmit power(dBm)

0


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/32QAM 64QAM/128QAM

Nominal maximumreceive power (dBm)

-20

Frequency stability(ppm)

±5

Transceiver Performance (High Power ODU)

Table 10-35 Transceiver performance (HP ODUs)

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/32QAM

64QAM/128QAM

256QAM


@7 GHz 30 28 25 23

@8 GHz 30 28 25 23

@11 GHz 28 26 22 20

@13 GHz 26 24 20 18

@15 GHz 26 24 20 18

@18 GHz 25.5 23 19 17

@23 GHz 25 23 19 17

@26 GHz 25 22 19 17

@32 GHz 23 21 17 15

@38 GHz 23 20 17 15

Nominal minimum transmit power (dBm)

@7 GHz 9

@8 GHz 9

@11 GHz 6

@13 GHz 3

@15 GHz 3

@18 GHz 2

@23 GHz 2



10-25

Item Performance

QPSK 16QAM/32QAM

64QAM/128QAM

256QAM

@26 GHz 2

@32 GHz 1

@38 GHz 1

Nominalmaximumreceive power(dBm)

-20 -25

Frequencystability (ppm)

±5

10.6.5 IF PerformanceThe IF performance includes the performance of the IF signal and the performance of the ODUO&M signal.

Table 10-36 IF performance

Item Performance

IF signal

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

350

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

140

Impedance (ohm) 50

ODU O&M signal

Modulation mode ASK

Transmit frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

5.5

Receive frequency of the IFboard (MHz)

10

10.6.6 Baseband Signal Processing Performance of the ModemThe baseband signal processing performance of the modem indicates the FEC coding schemeand the performance of the baseband time domain adaptive equalizer.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 10-37 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem

Item Performance

Encoding mode Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding.

Adaptive time-domain equalizer forbaseband signals

Supported.

10.7 Specifications of Clock InterfacesClock interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910 and synchronization performance of the equipmentcomply with related ITU-T standards.

Clock Interface Types

The OptiX PTN 910 provides external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces. Referto Table 10-38.

Table 10-38 Description of clock interfaces of the OptiX PTN 910

Clock Type Interface

Externalsynchronous source

Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) inputs of theclock signals, two inputs of the time signals (1PPS + TimeInformation mode or DCLS mode)

Synchronous output Two 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) outputs ofthe clock signals, two outputs of the time signals (1PPS + TimeInformation mode or DCLS mode)

Timing and Synchronization Performance

The timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX PTN 910 comply with ITU-T G.813.

Table 10-39 lists details on the timing and synchronization performance.

Table 10-39 Timing and synchronization performance

Output Jitter Output Frequency of theInternal Oscillator in Free-Run Mode

Long-Term PhaseVariation (LockedMode)

Compliant with ITU-T G.813 Compliant with ITU-T G.813 Compliant with ITU-T G.813



10-27

10.8 Reliability SpecificationsReliability specifications of the OptiX PTN 910 mainly include the system availability, systemmean annual repair rate, MTTR system mean repair time, and MTBF system mean fault interval.

Table 10-40 lists the reliability specifications of the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 10-40 Reliability specifications of the OptiX PTN 910


System availability 0.99999, which indicates that the annualoperation cessation time of the equipment isnot more than five minutes

System mean annual repair rate Less than 1.5%

MTTR system mean repair time 2 hours

MTBF system mean fault interval 199998 hours

10.9 EMC Performance SpecificationsThe OptiX PTN 910 has passed the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) related tests.

Table 10-41 lists the passed EMC-related test specifications.

Table 10-41 EMC test results

Test Item Test Standards

Radiated Emission CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A

Conducted Emission for DC Port CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A

Conducted Emission for Signal Ports CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A

Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-3(80 MHz - 2700 MHz: 10 V/m)

Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-2 (Air Discharge:±8 kV;Contact Discharge: ±6 kV)


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Test Item Test Standards

Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient Burstsfor DC Ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-4(±2 kV)

Immunity to Electrical Fast Transient Burstsfor Signal Ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-4(±1 kV)

Immunity to surges for DC Ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-5(Line to Line: ±1 kV: Line toGround:±2 kV)

Immunity to surges for Signal Ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-5(±1 kV)

Immunity to Continuous ConductedInterference for DC Ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)

Immunity to Continuous ConductedInterference for Signal Ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-6(10 V)

Immunity To Continuous Voltage dips andShort Interruption and Voltage Variation forDC Power Port

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.4.1ETSI ES 201 468 V1.3.1IEC 61000-4-29

Mains Power Contact ITU-T K.45

Power Induction ITU-T K.45

All test items of ETSI EN 300 132-2:2007 ETSI EN 300 132-2:2007

10.10 Safety CertificationsThe OptiX PTN 910 is awarded with multiple safety certificates.

Table 10-42 lists the safety certification that the OptiX PTN 910 accords.



10-29

Table 10-42 Safety certifications that the OptiX PTN 910 accords

Item Standard

Safety IEC 60950-1IEC/EN60215IEC/EN41003EN 60950-1UL 60950-1CSA C22.2 No 60950-1AS/NZS 60950-1BS EN 60950-1IS 13252GB4943

Laser safety FDA rules, 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11IEC60825-1, IEC60825-2, EN60825-1,EN60825-2GB7247

10.11 Environment RequirementsIn the case of storage, transportation, and operation, the environment of OptiX PTN 910 shouldcomply with ETS 300 019, IEC68-2-x, ETS300 753, and GR-63.

10.11.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for storage.

10.11.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for transportation.

10.11.3 Operation EnvironmentThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for operation.

10.11.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for storage.

Climate

Table 10-43 lists the climate requirements for the storage of the OptiX PTN 910.

Table 10-43 Climate requirements for the storage of the OptiX PTN 910

Item Requirement

Temperature - 40 ºC to +70 ºC

Relative humidity 10% to 100%


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Item Requirement

Temperature change rate ≤ 1 ºC/min

Wind speed ≤ 20 m/s

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/m2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/m2

Waterproof RequirementRequirement for storing equipment on the customer site: Generally, the equipment must bestored indoors.

No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. The equipment should beplaced away from places where water leakage is possible, such as near the automatic fire-fightingfacilities and heating facilities.

If the equipment is stored outdoors, the following conditions must be met.

l The carton must be intact.

l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.

l No water is on the ground where the carton is placed.

l The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine.

Biological Environmentl Prevent reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

l Take anti-rodent measures.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive

dust.l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined

in Table 10-44.l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined in

Table 10-45.

Table 10-44 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage

Mechanical Active Substance Content

Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3



10-31

Table 10-45 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤0.10 mg/m3

NO2 ≤0.50 mg/m3

NH3 ≤1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 10-46 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for storage.

Table 10-46 Requirements of mechanical stress for storage

Item Specification

Random vibration ASD - 0.02 m2/s3 -

Frequency range 5 Hz to 10Hz

10 Hz to 50 Hz 50 Hz to 100Hz

dB/oct 12 - - 12

10.11.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for transportation.

Climate

Table 10-47 lists climate requirements for transportation.

Table 10-47 Climate requirements for transportation

Item Requirement

Temperature - 40 ºCto +70 ºC

Relative humidity 10% to 100%


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Item Requirement

Temperature changerate

1 ºC/min





Waterproof Requirement

The following conditions must be met for transportation.

l The carton must be intact.

l Required rainproof measures must be taken so that the water does not enter the cartons.

l There must be no water on the transportation tools.

Biological Environmentl Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.



dust.

l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements definedin Table 10-48.

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined inTable 10-49.

Table 10-48 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation


Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤100 mg/m3

Table 10-49 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation


SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3



10-33


H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10mg/m3

Mechanical StressTable 10-50 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for transportation.

Table 10-50 Requirements of mechanical stress for transportation

Item Sub-Item Specification

Random vibration ASD 1 m2/s3 -3 dB

Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200Hz

Bump Direction of bump 6

Shock spectrum type(mass ≤ 50 kg)

Shock wave: semi-sine wave

Peak acceleration: 180 m/s2

Pulse width: 6 msShock times: 100 times in each direction

10.11.3 Operation EnvironmentThe OptiX PTN 910 requires proper environment for operation.

ClimateTable 10-51 and Table 10-52 list the climate requirements for the operation of the OptiX PTN910.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Table 10-51 Requirements on temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

With microwavefunction

Without microwavefunction

Long-termoperation

Short-termoperation

-5 ºC to 50 ºC -20 ºC to 60 ºC 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

NOTE

l Short-term operation indicates the continuous operation of less than 96 hours or uncontinuous operationof less than 15 accumulative days in one year.

l The temperature and relative humidity are measured at the place 1.5 m above floor and 0.4 m to thefront cabinet without any front or rear protection panel.

l If the equipment is installed in the cabinet, the effect of radiation can be ignored. If the equipment isinstalled outdoors, proper protection should be provided for the equipment against the radiation.

Table 10-52 Requirements on climate for operation

Item Requirement

Altitude ≤ 4000 m (If the altitude is lower than 1800 m, the equipment worksnormally. If the altitude is between 1800 m and 4000 m, theequipment working temperature should be 1 ºC decreased withevery 220 m increased in the altitude.)

Temperature changerate

0.5 ºC/min





Biological Environmentl Avoid reproduction of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.



dust.

l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements definedin Table 10-53.

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined inTable 10-54.



10-35

Table 10-53 Density restrictions for mechanical active substances during operation


Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3

Suspending dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 15 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3

Table 10-54 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation


SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NOx ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 3.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 10-55 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.

Table 10-55 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Specification

Sinusoidal vibration Velocity 5 mm/s -

Acceleration - 2 m/s2

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62Hz

62 Hz to 200 Hz

Shock Shock responsespectrum II

Half-sine waveform, 30 m/s2, 11 ms, 3 in eachdirection

NOTEA shock response spectrum is a graphical representation of an arbitrary transient acceleration input, suchas shock in terms of how the equipment responds to that input.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)



10-37

A Compliant Standards and Protocols

Environment StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ETSI EN 300 019-1 Environmental Engineering (EE)Environmental conditions and environmentaltests for telecommunications equipmentClassification of environmental conditions

ETSI EN 300 019-2 Environmental Engineering (EE)Environmental conditions and environmentaltests for telecommunications equipmentSpecification of environmental tests

ETSI EN 300 753 Equipment Engineering (EE)Acoustic noise emitted bytelecommunications equipment

IEC 60068-1 Environmental testingPart 1: General and guidance

IEC 60068-2 Basic environmental testing proceduresPart 2: Tests

IEC 600721-1 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 1: Environmental parameters and theirseverities

IEC 600721-2 Classification of environmental conditions-Part 2: Environmental conditions appearingin nature

IEC 600529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures(IP Code)

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description A Compliant Standards and Protocols


A-1

Standard or Protocol Title

QM333 Specification for environmental testing ofelectronic equipments for transmission andswitching use

GR-63 NEBS Requirements: Physical Protection

GR-63-CORE NEBSTM Requirements: Physical Protection

EMC StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ETSI EN 300 132-2 Equipment Engineering (EE): Power supplyinterface at the input to telecommunicationsequipmentPart 2: Operated by direct current (dc)

ETSI EN 300 386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radiospectrum Matters (ERM)Telecommunication network equipmentElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)requirements

CISPR22 Information technology equipment-Radiodisturbance characteristics-Limits andmethods of measurement

GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and ElectricalSafety - Generic Criteria for NetworkTelecommunications Equipment

IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)- Part4-2: Testing and measurement techniques -Electrostatic discharge immunity test

IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)- Part4-3: Testing and measurement techniques -Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagneticfield immunity test

IEC 61000-4-4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)- Part4-4: Testing and measurement techniques -Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test

IEC 61000-4-5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part4-5: Testing and measurement techniques -Surge immunity test

A Compliant Standards and ProtocolsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


IEC 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part4-6: Testing and measurement techniques -Immunity to conducted disturbances, inducedby radio-frequency field

IEC 61000-4-29 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)- Part4-29: Testing and measurement techniques-Voltage dips, shot interruptions and voltagevariations on d.c. input power port immunitytests

ETSI EN 301 489-1V1.6.1: 200 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radiospectrum Matters (ERM)ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)standard for radio equipment and servicesPart 1: Common technical requirements

ETSI EN 301 489-4V1.3.1: 2002 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radiospectrum Matters (ERM)ElectroMagnetic Compatibility (EMC)standard for radio equipment and servicesPart 4: Specific conditions for fixed radiolinks and ancillary equipment and services

Safety Compliance StandardStandard or Protocol Title

IEC/EN/UL 60950-1 Information technology equipment - Safety -Part 1: General requirements

IEC/EN 60825-1 Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipmentclassification, requirements and user's guide

IEC/EN 60825-2 Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety ofoptical fibre communication systems (OFCS)

21 CFR 1040.10/1040.11 Performance standards for light-emitting-products

Ethernet Service StandardStandard or Protocol Title

IEEE802.1D Media access control (MAC) bridges

IEEE802.1Q Virtual bridged local area networks



A-3


IEEE802.1ad Provider bridges

IEEE802.1ag Connectivity fault management

ITU-T G.8012 Ethernet UNI and Ethernet NNI

ITU-T G.1731 OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernetbased networks

ITU-T G.8031 Ethernet protection switching

ITU-T G.8010 Architecture of Ethernet layer networks

ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet servicesframework

ITU-T G.8021 Characteristics of Ethernet transport networkequipment functional blocks

MEF MEF2 Requirements and framework for Ethernetservice protection in metro Ethernet networks

MEF MEF4 Metro Ethernet network architectureframework - Part 1: generic framework

L2VPN StandardStandard or Protocol Title

draft-ietf-l2vpn-oam-req-frmk-05 L2VPN OAM requirements and framework

draft-ietf-l2vpn-signaling-08 Provisioning, autodiscovery, and signaling inL2VPNs

RFC 4664 Framework for layer 2 virtual privatenetworks (L2VPNs)

RFC 4665 Service Requirements for Layer 2 Provider-Provisioned Virtual Private Networks

RFC 4762 Virtual Private LAN Service (VPLS) UsingLabel Distribution Protocol (LDP) Signaling

MPLS StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ITU-T G.8112 Interfaces for the transport MPLS (T-MPLS)hierarchy


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


ITU-T G.8131 Protection switching for transport MPLS (T-MPLS) networks

ITU-T Y.1711 Operation & Maintenance mechanism forMPLS networks

ITU-T Y.1720 Protection switching for MPLS networks

ITU-T Y.1561 Performance and availability parameters forMPLS networks

ITU-T G.8110 MPLS layer network architecture

ITU-T G.8110.1 Application of MPLS in the transportnetwork

ITU-T G.8121 Characteristics of transport MPLS equipmentfunctional blocks

ITU-T Y.1710 Requirements for OAM functionality forMPLS networks

RFC 2702 Requirements for traffic engineering overMPLS

RFC 2205 Resource Reservation protocol (RSVP) -version 1 functional specification

RFC 3031 MPLS architecture

RFC 3469 Framework for multi-protocol labelswitching (MPLS)-based recovery

RFC 3811 Definitions of textual conventions formultiprotocol label switching (MPLS)management

RFC 3812 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) trafficengineering management information base

RFC 3813 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS) labelswitching router (LSR) managementinformation base

RFC 3814 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS)forwarding equivalence class to next hoplabel forwarding entry (FEC-To-NHLFE)management information base

RFC 4220 Traffic engineering link managementinformation base

RFC 4221 Multiprotocol label switching (MPLS)management overview



A-5


RFC 4377 Operations and management (OAM)requirements for multi-protocol labelswitched (MPLS) networks

RFC 4378 A framework for multi-protocol labelswitching (MPLS) operations andmanagement (OAM)

RFC 3032 MPLS label stack encoding

RFC 3036 LDP specification

RFC 3037 LDP applicability

RFC 3209 Extensions to RSVP for LSP tunnels

RFC 3210 Applicability statement for extensions toRSVP for LSP tunnels

RFC 3215 LDP state machine

RFC 3477 Signalling unnumbered links in resourceReservation protocol - traffic engineering(RSVP-TE)

RFC 3478 Graceful restart mechanism for labeldistribution protocol

RFC 3612 Applicability statement for restartmechanisms for the label distributionprotocol (LDP)

RFC 3815 Definitions of managed objects for themultiprotocol label switching(MPLS), labeldistribution protocol(LDP)

RFC 3936 Procedures for modifying the resourcereservation protocol(RSVP)

RFC 4090 Fast reroute extensions to RSVP-TE for LSPtunnels

RFC 4182 Removing a restriction on the use of MPLSexplicit NULL

RFC 4201 Link bundling in MPLS traffic engineering(TE)

draft-ietf-mpls-soft-preemption-08 MPLS traffic engineering soft preemption

RFC 3609 Tracing requirements for generic tunnels

RFC 4204 Link management protocol (LMP)

RFC 4327 Link management protocol (LMP)management information base (MIB)


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

PWE3 Standard


RFC 3916 Requirements for pseudo-wire emulationedge-to-edge (PWE3)

RFC 3985 Pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)architecture

RFC 4197 Requirements for edge-to-edge emulation oftime division multiplexed (TDM) circuitsover packet switching networks

RFC 4385 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)control word for use over an MPLS PSN

RFC 4446 IANA allocations for pseudowire edge toedge emulation (PWE3)

RFC 4447 Pseudowire setup and maintenance using thelabel distribution Protocol (LDP)

RFC 4448 Encapsulation methods for transport ofEthernet over MPLS networks

RFC 4720 Pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)frame check sequence retention

RFC 4553 Structure-agnostic time divisionmultiplexing (TDM) over packet (SAToP)

draft-ietf-pwe3-cesopsn-07 Structure-aware TDM circuit emulationservice over packet switched network(CESoPSN)

draft-ietf-pwe3-vccv-11 Pseudo wire virtual circuit connectivityverification (VCCV)

draft-ietf-pwe3-segmented-pw-03 Segmented pseudo wire

draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-requirements-03 Requirements for inter domain pseudo-wires

draft-ietf-pwe3-ms-pw-arch-02 An architecture for multi-segment pseudowire emulation edge-to-edge

Layer 2 Protocol Standard


RFC 0826 Ethernet address resolution protocol

RFC 3046 DHCP relay agent information option



A-7

QoS StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ITU-T Y.1291 An architectural framework for support ofquality of service (QoS) in packet networks

MEF MEF10 Ethernet services attributes phase 1

RFC 3289 Management information base for thedifferentiated services architecture

RFC 3644 Policy quality of service (QoS) Informationmodel

RFC 3670 Information model for describing networkdevice QoS datapath mechanisms

RFC 2212 Specification of guaranteed quality of service

RFC 2474 Definition of the differentiated services field(DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 headers

RFC 2475 An architecture for differentiated services

RFC 2597 Assured forwarding PHB group

RFC 2697 A single rate three color marker

RFC 2698 A two rate three color marker

RFC 3140 Per hop behavior identification codes

RFC 3246 An expedited forwarding PHB (Per-hopbehavior)

RFC 3270 Multi-protocol label switching (MPLS)support of differentiated services

RFC 3564 Requirements for support of differentiatedservices-aware MPLS traffic engineering

RFC 4124 Protocol extensions for support of diffserv-aware MPLS traffic engineering

RFC 4125 Maximum allocation bandwidth constraintsmodel for diffserv-aware MPLS trafficengineering

RFC 4127 Russian dolls bandwidth constraints modelfor diffserv-aware MPLS traffic engineering

RFC 4128 Bandwidth constraints models fordifferentiated services (Diffserv)-awareMPLS traffic engineering


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

ATM StandardStandard or Protocol Title

RFC4717 Encapsulation Methods for Transport ofAsynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) overMPLS Networks

RFC4816 Pseudowire Emulation Edge-to-Edge(PWE3) Asynchronous Transfer Mode(ATM) Transparent Cell Transport Service

RFC2684 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATMAdaptation Layer 5

ITU-T I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenanceprinciples and functions

AF-PHY-0086.001 AF-PHY-0086.001 Inverse Multiplexing forATM Specification Version 1.1

AF-TM-0121.000 Traffic Management Specification

SDH StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ITU-T G.703 Physical/electrical characteristics ofhierarchical digital interfaces

ITU-T G.707 Network node interface for the synchronousdigital hierarchy (SDH)

ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces formanagement of transmission systems

ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH networkprotection architectures

ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces for equipments andsystems relating to the synchronous digitalhierarchy

Microwave StandardStandard or Protocol Title

ITU-R F.384-7 Radio-frequency channel arrangements formedium and high capacity analogue or digitalradio-relay systems operating in the upper 6GHz band



A-9


ITU-R F.383-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forhigh capacity radio-relay systems operatingin the lower 6 GHz band

ITU-R F.385-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forfixed wireless systems operating in the 7 GHzband

ITU-R F.386-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements formedium and high capacity analogue or digitalradio-relay systems operating in the 8 GHzband

ITU-R F.387-9 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forradio-relay systems operating in the 11 GHzband

ITU-R F.497-6 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forradio-relay systems operating in the 13 GHzfrequency band


ITU-R F.595-8 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forfixed wireless systems operating in the 18GHz frequency band


ITU-R F.748-3 Radio-frequency channel arrangements forradio-relay systems operating in the 25, 26and 28 GHz bands

ITU-R F.749-2 Radio-frequency arrangements for systems ofthe fixed service operating in the 38 GHzband

ITU-R F.1191-1 1 Bandwidths and unwanted emissions ofdigital radio-relay systems

ITU-R SM.329-10 Unwanted emissions in the spurious domain

ETSI EN 302 217-1 V1.1.4 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements for point-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 1: Overview andsystemindependent common characteristics


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)


ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.1.3 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements for point-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 2-1: System-dependentrequirements for digital systems operating infrequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied

ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements forpoint-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 2-2: Harmonized EN coveringessential requirements of Article 3.2 ofR&Directive for digital systems operating infrequency bands where frequency co-ordination is applied

ETSI EN 302 217-3 V1.1.3 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements forpoint-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 3: Harmonized EN coveringessential requirements of Article 3.2 ofR&Directive for equipment operating infrequency bands where no frequencycoordination is applied

ETSI EN 302 217-4-1 V1.1.3 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements for point-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 4-1: System-dependentrequirements for antennas

ETSI EN 302 217-4-2 V1.2.1 Fixed Radio Systems; Characteristics andrequirements for point-topoint equipment andantennas; Part 4-2: Harmonized EN coveringessential requirements of Article 3.2 ofR&Directive for antennas

ETSI EN 301 126-1 V1.1.2 Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing;Part 1: Point-to-Point equipment -Definitions, general requirements and testprocedures

ETSI EN 301 126-3-1 V1.1.2 Fixed Radio Systems; Conformance testing;Part 3-1: Point-to-Point antennas;Definitions, general requirements and testprocedures

ETSI EN 301 390 V1.2.1 Fixed Radio Systems; Point-to-point andMultipoint Systems; Spurious emissions andreceiver immunity limits atequipment/antenna port of Digital Fixed Radio Systems

iec 60153-2-1974 Hollow metallic waveguides Part 2: Relevantspecifications for ordinary rectangularwaveguides



A-11


iec 60154-2-1980 Flanges for waveguides Part 2: Relevantspecifications for flanges for ordinaryrectangular waveguides


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

B Label

The equipment has safety labels and optical module labels.

B.1 Safety LabelsThe equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locationsof these safety labels.

B.2 Optical Module LabelsOptical module labels, attached onto optical modules, are used to distinguish different types ofoptical modules.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description B Label


B-1

B.1 Safety LabelsThe equipment has various safety labels. This section describes the suggestions and locationsof these safety labels.

Label DescriptionThere are labels on the chassis and boards. See Table B-1.

Table B-1 Label description

Figure Type Description

ESD protection label The label suggests theelectrostatic-sensitiveequipment.

Chassis grounding label The label suggestions thegrounding position.

Fan warning label The label suggests that do nottouch the fan leaves when thefan is rotating.

!

Operation warning label The label indicates theprecaution that should betaken for operations on thePIU board. For details, seeLabel

High temperaturewarning label

If the ambient temperatureexceeds 55ºC, thetemperature at the board panelsurface may exceed 70ºC. Inthis case, wear gloves to touchthe board.

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

! Operation warning label Power off the ODU beforeremoving the IF cable.

RoHS label The equipment is in line withthe RoHS-relatedenvironment-friendlyrequirements.

B LabelOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Figure Type Description

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

Qualification label The equipment is qualified.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

OptiX PTN 910POWER RATING: -48－-60V;5A

华为技术有限公司中国制造

电源额定值

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO.,LTD. MADE IN CHINA

N 14036

Class 1 Laser Product Product nameplate label The label suggests theproduct name andcertification.

NOTE

The current on the nameplate of the equipment indicates the maximum current when the equipment hasthe microwave feature.

Label PositionFigure B-1 shows positions of labels on the chassis.

Figure B-1 Label position

合格证/QUALIFICATION CARD

华为技术有限公司中国制作MADE IN CHINAHUAW EI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

HUAWEI

OptiX PTN 910

华为技术有限公司中国制造

电源额定值

HUAWEI TECHNOLGIES CO., LTD. MADE IN CHINA

N 14036

Class 1 Laser Product

WARNING-48V OUTPUT

TURN OFF POWER BEFOREDISCONNECTING IF CABLE

!

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

POWER RATING: -48－-60V;5A

!

B.2 Optical Module LabelsOptical module labels, attached onto optical modules, are used to distinguish different types ofoptical modules.



B-3

As shown in Table B-2, different types of optical modules have different codes.

Table B-2 Codes and types of optical modules

OpticalModule Code

OpticalInterfaceType

Optical Module BasicInformation

MappingBoard

34060286 1000BASE-SX(0.5 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 850 nm,2.125 Gbit/s (Multi rate), LC, Multi-mode, 0.5 km

CXPG/CXPHEG2

34060473 1000BASE-LX(10 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm,1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 10 km

34060290 1000BASE-LX(10 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm,1.25 Gbit/s, LC ( - 40 to 85), Single-mode, 10 km

34060298 1000BASE-VX(40 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm,1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 40 km

34060360 1000BASE-ZX(80 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm,1.25 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

34060324 1000BASE-ZX(80 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1550 nm,1.25 Gbit/s, LC (-40 to 85), Single-mode, 80 km

34060483 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)

Optical transceiver, eSFP, 1471 nm,100 Mbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s, LC, Single-mode, 80 km

CXPG/CXPHEG2

34060481 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060479 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060482 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060478 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


B LabelOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

B-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

OpticalModule Code

OpticalInterfaceType

Optical Module BasicInformation

MappingBoard

34060476 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060477 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060480 1000BASE-CWDM(80 km)


34060276 100BASE-FX/S-1.1(15 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm,STM1, LC, Single-mode, 15 km

EF8FCD1

34060307 100BASE-FX/S-1.1(15 km)


34060281 100BASE-FX/L-1.1(40 km)


34060308 100BASE-FX/L-1.1(40 km)

Optical Transceiver, eSFP, 1310 nm,STM1 LC, Single-mode, 40 km

34060282 100BASE-FX/L-1.2(80 km)


34060309 100BASE-FX/L-1.2(80 km)




B-5

C Indicators

This section describes the names of various indicators and their indications.

Boards and Their Indicators

Board Indicator

CXPA/CXPB STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, CRIT, MAJ, MIN, PWR, LINK,ACT

CXPG/CXPH STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, CRIT, MAJ, MIN, PWR, L/A1,L/A2, LINK, ACT

EF8T STAT, SRV, LINK, ACT

EF8F STAT, SRV, LINK1 - LINK8

EG2 STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, ACT1, ACT2

ML1/ML1A STAT, SRV

CD1 STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2

IFE2 STAT, SRV, LINK, ODU, RMT, ACT

ADS2A/ASD2B STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2

SHD4 STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, LINK3, LINK4

SHD4I STAT, SRV, LINK1, LINK2, LINK3, LINK4

PIU PWRA, PWRB

FAN FAN

Description of the Board Status Indicator (STAT)

Status Indication

On (green) The board is working normally.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description C Indicators


C-1

Status Indication

On (red) The board hardware is faulty.

On (orange) It indicates the power-on aging state of the interface board.The logic is not loaded.

Off No power is input, the board is not created, or the board is notrunning.

Description of the Program Running Indicator (PROG)Status Indication

On (green) The board software is normally initialized or the board softwareis running normally.

On (red) The memory self-check fails.Loading of the board software fails.The board software is lost.The logic file is lost.Executing the initial NE configuration scripts stored in the CFcard fails.Restoring the NE configuration data from the CF card fails.

On for 10s (green)a Executing the initial NE configuration scripts stored in the CFcard is successful.Restoring the NE configuration data from the CF card issuccessful.

On for 100 ms and off for100 ms alternately (green)

Loading of the board software or logic software is in process.


The board software is being initialized and is in the BIOS bootstatus.Execution of the initial NE configuration scripts stored in theCF card is in progress.Restoration of the NE configuration data from the CF card is inprogress.

On for 100 ms and off for100 ms alternatively (red)

The memory self-check fails or loading of the logic softwarefails.

Off No power supply is accessed.

NOTEa: The PROG indicator stays on and green for 10s and then automatically recovers the original status beforeexecution of the NE initial configuration scripts stored in the CF card or restoration of the NE configurationdata from the CF card.

C IndicatorsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Description of the Synchronization Status Indicator (SYNC)

Status Indication

On (green) The clock is working normally.

On (red) The clock source is lost or the clock source is switched.

Off Loading of the board software fails.

Description of the Service Status Indicator (SRV)

Status Indication

On (green) Services are running normally and no service-related alarmoccurs.

On (red) A critical or major service-related alarm occurs.

On (Orange) A minor or remote service-related alarm occurs.

Off No service is configured or loading of the board software fails.

Description of the Data Transceiving Status Indicator (ACT)

Status Indication

On for 100 ms and off for100 ms alternately(yellow)

The data interface is transmitting or receiving data.

Off The data interface is not connected or connected incorrectly.

Description of the CXPG/CXPH Port Connection Status Indicator (L/A)

Status Indication

On (green) The connection at the physical port is normal.

Blinking (orange) Data is received or transmitted at the port.

Off The physical connection fails.

Description of the EF8F/EG2 Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)

Status Indication

On (green) The physical connection of the port is normal.



C-3

Status Indication

Off The physical connection of the port is faulty.

Description of the CD1 Port Status Indicator (LOS1/LOS2)Status Indication

On (green) The signal at the port is normal.

On (red) The signal at the port is lost.

Off The optical module is offline.

Description of the IFE2 Port Connection Status Indicator (LINK)Status Indication

On (green) The radio link of the port is normal.

Off (red) The radio link of the port is faulty.

ODU Status Indicator (ODU)Status Indication

On (green) The ODU works normally.

On (red) The ODU has critical or major alarms, or hasno power access.

On (orange) The ODU has minor alarms.

On for 300 ms and off for 300 ms alternately(yellow)

The actually received power of the ODU islower than the power to be received.

Remote Status Indicator (RMT)Status Indication

On (orange) The radio defect alarm indication is receivedfrom the remote end.

Off The remote end receives services normally.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

Description of the IFE2 Protection Status Indicator (ACT)Status Indication

On (green) The board is in the active state (1+1 protection).The board is activated (no protection).

Off The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection).The board is not activated (no protection).

Description of the Port Status Indicators of the ADS2 (LINK1 and LINK2)Status Indication

On (green) The service connection is normal.


The board software is successfully initialized or no service isaccessed.


Activation of the service connection is in process.

Off No power is input or the activated service connection isinterrupted.

Description of the Port Status Indicators of the SHD4/SHD4I (LINK1, LINK2,LINK3, and LINK4)

Status Indication

On (green) Loading of the software is in process or the service connectionis normal.

Off No power is input or the physical port connection fails.

Description of the Critical Alarm Indicator (CRIT)Status Indication

On (red) Critical alarm(s) occurs on any board inside the chassis.

Off No critical alarm occurs on any board inside the chassis.



C-5

Description of the Major Alarm Indicator (MAJ)Status Indication

On (orange) Major alarm(s) occurs on any board inside the chassis.

Off No major alarm occurs on any board inside the chassis.

Description of the Minor Alarm Indicator (MIN)Status Indication

On (yellow) Minor alarm(s) occurs on any board inside the chassis.

Off No minor alarm occurs on any board inside the chassis.

Description of the Power Supply Status Indicator (PWRA/PWRB)Status Indication

On (green) Power is accessed.

Off No power is accessed or the power supply poles are inverselyconnected.

Description of the Fan Status Indicator (FAN)Status Indication

On (green) The fans are working normally.

On (red) The fans are working abnormally.

Off The fans are not powered on or no fan is installed.


Product Description


Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

D Glossary

A

ATM The asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) is designed to transfercell in which multiple service types (such as voice, video, ordata) are conveyed in fixed-length (53-byte) cells. Fixed-lengthcells allow cell processing to occur in hardware, therebyreducing transit delays.

Air interface link A link used to transmit radio frequencies between mobilephones and base stations.

B

BTS Base transceiver station. It terminates the radio interface. Itallows transmission of traffic and signaling across the airinterface. The BTS includes the baseband processing, radioequipment, and the antenna.

BSC Base station controller. A BSC is used to control the radiosignals of the receiving and transmitting base stations.

C

CES Circuit emulation service. A technology adapts the traditionalnarrowband services, that is, TDM services, to the wideband.

CoS Class of Service. A queuing discipline. An algorithm comparesfields of packets or CoS tags to classify packets and to assign toqueues of differing priority. CoS can not ensure networkperformance or guarantee priority in delivering packets.

Concatenation A process that combines multiple virtual containers. Thecombined capacities can be used as a single capacity. Theconcatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description D Glossary


D-1

Control plane The control plane performs the call control and connectioncontrol functions. Through signaling, the control plane sets upand releases connections, and may restore a connection in caseof a failure. The control plane also performs other functions insupport of call and connection control, such as routinginformation dissemination.

E

E-Line Ethernet line. An point-to-point private service type that isprovided for the user Ethernet in different domains.

F

FEC Forwarding equivalence class. A term used in multiprotocollabel switching (MPLS) to describe a group of packets whichare forwarded in the same manner (e.g., over the same path, withthe same forwarding treatment). FEC can be classified byaddress, service type, priority and QOS of packets, and may bebound to a MPLS label.

FEC Forward Error Correction. FEC is a technology of error controlfor data transmission, whereby the sender adds redundant datato its messages, which allows the receiver to detect and correcterrors (within some bound).

Flow classification In the case of flow classification, all the services from Layer 2to Layer 7 of the OSI model are searched out and the servicetypes are classified.

Frame Refers to a cyclic set of consecutive timeslots in which therelative position of each time slot can be identified In thetransmission network. Refers to the packet data unit of the datalink layer in the OSI model. It consists of frame header, userdata and frame tail. The frame header and frame tail are usedfor synchronization and error control.

Forwarding plane The forwarding plane is also referred to as data plane, whichforwards packets under the management of the control plane.

H

Heat consumption Amount of heat dissipated by the equipment per second whenthe equipment is working. As energy exchange in other formsmay exist, power consumption of a equipment is generally lowerthan the power consumption of the equipment.

I

D GlossaryOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

D-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

IS-IS IS-IS inter-domain rerouting information switching protocol.The IS-IS protocol is a dynamic routing protocol designed byISO for connectionless network protocol (CLNP).

IMA Inverse multiplexing over ATM. A physical layer technologyin which a high-speed stream of ATM cells is broken up andtransmitted across multiple T1/E1 links, then is reconstructedback into the original ATM cell order at the destination. IMA isfirst standardized (v1.0) by the ATM Forum in 1997, andrecently updated (v1.1) in 1999.

L

L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network. A virtual private networkrealized in the packet switched (IP/MPLS) network by Layer 2switching technologies.

LSR label switch router. LSR is to forward packets in an MPLSnetwork by looking only at the fixed-length label.

LSP Label switch path. An ingress and egress switched path builtthrough a series of LSRs to forward the packets of a particularFEC using a label swapping forwarding mechanism.

LDP Label Distribution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 3036for distributing labels in MPLS network. It is the set ofprocedures and messages by which Label Switched Routers(LSRs) establish Label Switched Paths (LSPs) through anetwork by mapping network-layer routing information directlyto data-link layer switched paths. More information about theapplicability of LDP can be found in RFC3037.

link A "topological component" that provides transport capacitybetween two endpoints in different subnetworks via a fixed (thatis, inflexible routing) relationship.

M

MPLS OAM The MPLS OAM provides continuity check for a single LSP,and provides a set of fault detection tools and fault correctmechanisms for MPLS networks.

N

node In a network, a point where one or more functional unitsinterconnect transmission lines.

P



D-3

PWE3 pseudo wire emulation edge to edge. A mechanism thatemulates the essential attributes of service (such as a E1 leasedline or Frame Relay) over a PSN.

Package loading A method used to upgrade, load, and manage NE-level softwarein a centralized manner.

packet A logical grouping of information including header and(usually) user data.

PW Pseudo wire. A mechanism that bears the simulated servicesbetween PEs on the PSN.

Q

QoS Quality of Service. A set of service requirements to be met bythe network while transporting a connection or flow; thecollective effect of service performance which determine thedegree of satisfaction of a user of the service. (E.360.1)

R

Route Path through an network.

S

Switch To filter, forward frames based on label or the destinationaddress of each frame. This behavior operates at the data linklayer of the OSI model.

T

Tunnel A information transmission channel that is set up between twoentities in the application of VPN. A tunnel provides sufficientsecurity to prevent intrusion to the VPN internal information.

Traffic engineering A technique that can creates data forwarding paths for nodesbased on the available resources on the network and reservebandwidths for key traffic.

V

VC A unidirectional logical connection between two nodes.

VPWS virtual private wire service. A Virtual Private Wire Service(VPWS) is a point-to-point circuit (link) connecting twoCustomer Edge devices. The link is established as a logical linkthrough a packet switched network.

D GlossaryOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

D-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)



D-5

E Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

AF Assured Forwarding

AM Adaptive and Modulation

ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

B

BSC Base Station Controller

BTS Base Transceiver Station

BGP Border Gateway Protocol

C

CES Circuit Emulation Service

CSPF Constraint-based Shortest Path First

CE Customer Edge

CoS Class of Service

CR-LDP Constraint-Routing Label DistributionProtocol

CC Continuity Check

OptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN SeriesProduct Description E Acronyms and Abbreviations


E-1

CIR Committed Information Rate

D

DCN Data Communication Network

DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point

DS Differentiated Services

E

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications StandardsInstitute

E-Line Ethernet-Line

F

FEC Forwarding Equivalence Class

FEC Forward Error Correction

FD Frequency Diversity

FRR Fast ReRoute

G

GPS Global Positioning System

H

HSB Hot Standby

HSDPA High Speed Downlink Packet Access

I

IP Internet Protocol

E Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

E-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and ElectronicsEngineers

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -Telecommunication Standardization Sector

L

LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LSP Label Switched Path

LSR Label Switched Router

LDP Label Distribution Protocol

L3VPN Layer3 Virtual Private Network

L2VPN Layer2 Virtual Private Network

LMP Link Management Protocol

LSDB Link-State Database

M

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching

MP Merge Point

MAC Medium Access Control

N

NNI Network to Network Interface

NSF Not Stop Forwarding

O

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

P



E-3

PTN Packet Transport Network

PE Provider Edge

PW Pseudo Wire

PWE3 Pseudo Wire Emulation Edge-to-Edge

PSN Packet Switched Network

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PHP Penultimate Hop Popping

PHB Per-Hop Behavior

PLR Point of Local Repair

PPVPN Provider Provisioned VPN

PIR Peak Information Rate

Q

QoS Quality of Service

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RSVP Resource Reservation Protocol

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RNC Radio Network Controller

S

SD Space Diversity

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

T

TE Traffic Engineering

TDM Time Division Multiplex

TTL Time to Live

TEDB Traffic Engineering Database

E Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX PTN 910 Packet Transport Platform of PTN Series

Product Description

E-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-10-15)

U

UNI User Network Interface

V

VC Virtual Channel

VCC Virtual Channel Connection

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VP Virtual Path

VPN Virtual Private Network

VPC Virtual Path Connection

VPWS Virtual Private Wire Service

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

VRF Virtual Routing and Forwarding

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

W

WRED Weighted Random Early Detection

WMS Wholesale Managed Services

X

xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line



E-5

00542662-product description(v100r001c01_02)

Documents

huawei trademarks

huawei proprietary

huawei industrial basebantian

equipment features

service types

maximum access capabilities

optix ptn

thepurchase scope